Chevrolet 2003 Trailblazer Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2003-Chevrolet-Trailblazer-Owners-Manual-813620 chevrolet-2003-chevrolet-trailblazer-owners-manual-813620 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 426 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The
2003
Chevy
TraiIBIazerTTraiIBIazer
EXT
Owner Manual
wm
Seats and Restraint Systems
...........................
1-1
Front Seats
...............................................
1-2
Rear Seats
...............................................
1-6
Safety Belts
..............................................
1-9
Child Restraints
.......................................
1-29
Air Bag Systems
......................................
1-49
Restraint System Check
............................
1-59
Keys
........................................................
2-3
Doors and Locks
.......................................
2-8
Windows
.................................................
2-1 4
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................
2-1
7
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
...........
2-19
Mirrors
....................................................
2-34
Onstar@ System
.......................................
2-38
HomeLink@ Transmitter
..............................
2-40
Storage Areas
.........................................
2-44
Sunroof
..................................................
2-51
Vehicle Personalization
.............................
2-52
Instrument Panel .............................................
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
..........................
3-4
Climate Controls
......................................
3-1
9
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
.........
3-32
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Driver Information Center (DIC)
..................
3-46
Audio System(s)
.......................................
3-58
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
.....
4-2
Towing
...................................................
4-42
Service
.....................................................
5-3
Fuel
5-5
Rear Axle
...............................................
5-45
Four-wheel Drive ..................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement
....................................
5-48
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
.........
5-50
Tires
......................................................
5-53
Appearance Care
.....................................
5-75
Vehicle Identification
.................................
5-83
Electrical System
......................................
5-84
Capacities and Specifications
.....................
5-96
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
......
5-98
Maintenance Schedule
................................
6-2
Customer Assistance Information
....................
7-1
Customer Assistance Information
..................
7-2
Driving Your Vehicle
.......................................
4-1
Service and Appearance Care
..........................
5-1
Checking Things Under the Hood
...............
5-10
.........................................................
Maintenance Schedule
.....................................
6-1
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 7-9
Index
................................................................
1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name
TRAlLBLAZER/TRAILBLAZER EXT are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there
if
you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so
the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part
No.
C
2338 A First Edition
Canadian Owners
YOU can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit,
MI
48207
How
to
Use
This
Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 07/15/02
All Rights Resewed
ii
Safety
Warnings
and
Symbols
You will find a number
of
safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION
to
tell
you about
things that could hurt you
if
you were to ignore the
warning.
?se mean tl
-
.s
something that could hurt
you or other people.
I
I
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what
to
do
to
help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
I
I
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book.
This
safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
’
“Don’t do this” or
“Don’t
let
this happen.”
...
Ill
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also,
in this book you will find these notices:
Notices
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A
notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what
to
do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead
of
text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating
to
a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
If
you need help figuring
out
a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the
following topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section
1
Features and Controls in Section
2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section
3
Climate Controls in Section
3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section
3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section
5
iv
These
are
some
examples
of
vehicle
symbols
you
may
find
on
your
vehicle:
POSSIBLE
p\
CAUTlON
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
&
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK
OR
COULD
FLAME
'111'
EXPLODE
I
BATERY
I
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT OCCUPANT
48:
@
DO NOT TWIST SAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
MOVE
SEAT
FULLY
\$!!
REARWARD+
/z
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
PULL BELT
COMPLETELY
THEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
POWER
WINDOW
DO
NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
DO
NOT INSTALL A
FORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
LIGHTING
-
MASTER SWITCH
0
B-
,
\
SIGNALS
@+
TURN
LAMPS
P5
RUNNING
*::io
DAYTIME
LAMPS
LAMPS
#O
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
-
CHARGING
I-1
BATTERY
SYSTEM
COOLANT
a
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
Wb
ANTI-LOCK
(@)
BRAKES
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
FUE
OWNERS
MANUAL
SERVICE
MANUAL
V
.&
NOTES
vi
Seats
and
Restraint Systems
Front Seats
..................................................
1.2
Manual Seats
................................................
1-2
Power Seats .................................................. 1.2
Manual Lumbar
..............................................
1-3
Power Lumbar
...............................................
1-3
Heated Seats
.................................................
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-4
Head Restraints
.............................................
1-5
Rear Seats
.......................................................
1.6
Rear Seat Operation
.......................................
1.6
Safety Belts
.....................................................
1.9
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
.................
1.9
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
......
1-13
How
to
Wear Safety Belts Properly
.................
1-1 4
Driver Position
..............................................
1.1
4
Right Front Passenger Position
.......................
1.22
Rear Seat Passengers
..................................
1.22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
.......................................
1.25
Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1.28
Child Restraints ............................................. 1.29
Older Children
..............................................
1-29
Infants and Young Children
............................
1.31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
..................
1-21
Child Restraint Systems
.................................
1.35
Where
to
Put the Restraint ............................. 1-38
Top Strap
...................................................
.l -38
Top Strap Anchor Location
.............................
1-40
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
...........................
1-40
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
.........................................
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint
Seat Position
...............
Securing a Child Restraint
Seat Position
...............
Center Seat Position
........
in a Rear Outside
............................
.l -43
in the Right Front
.............................
1
-46
.............................
1.48
Air
Bag Systems
............................................
1.49
Where Are the Air Bags?
...............................
1-52
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
....................
1-54
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
.....................
1-55
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
.....................
1-55
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates?
.......
1.56
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
.........
1.58
Restraint System Check
..................................
1-59
Checking Your Restraint Systems
...................
1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
............................................
1.60
1-1
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this feature. This control is
located on the outboard side of
the
seat.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this feature. The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback lumbar support can be adjusted
by moving a single control located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Heated Seats
7
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used
to
control this
feature are located on
the front door armrests.
The engine must be
running for the heated seat
feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedly
to
cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, low and
off.
The indicator lights will glow to
designate the level of heat selected: three for high, two
for medium and one for low. The low setting warms
the seatback and cushion until the seat temperature is
near body temperature. The medium and high
settings heat the seatback and seat cushion
to
a slightly
higher temperature. You will be able
to
feel heat in
about two minutes.
1
-3
To heat only the seatback, press the button with the
words “BACK
ONLY’.
An indicator light on the seatback
switch will glow to designate that only the seatback is
being heated. Additional presses will cycle through
the heat levels for the seatback only. Press the
horizontal button again to heat the whole seat.
The feature will shut
off
automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
Reclining Seatbacks
If
your vehicle has a manual recliner, lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat and push the
seatback rearward to recline the seatback.
To
return the
seatback to the normal position, lift the lever without
pushing rearward on the seatback and the seatback will
move forward.
If your vehicle has power seat controls, the vertical
power seat control described earlier allows the seatback
to recline.
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if
your vehicle is
moving.
1
-4
Head
Restraints
Sitting
in
a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous, Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like
this.
The shoulder belt can’t do
its
job. In a crash,
you could
go
into
it,
receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either.
In
a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle
is
in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly. Adjust your head restraint
so
that the top
of
the restraint
is
closest to the top
of
your head. This position
reduces the chance
of
a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints lock into place when raised.
To
release the head restraint and lower it, press the
tab
located
on
the top
of
the seatback.
1
-5
Rear
Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle may have a folding rear seat which lets
you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
The rear seatback handles
are located on the
outboard side of the rear
seatbacks.
---.=_-
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the
handle. The head restraint will automatically fold out of
the way when the seatback is folded down.
To
raise the seatbacks, lift up the seatbacks and push
on them until they lock into the upright position.
Push and pull on the seatbacks to make sure that they
are latched securely. Then fold the bottom seat
cushion back into place.
Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out
of the way. This will allow the seatback to
fold
flat
and increase the cargo area.
1
-6
Safety
Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with saf-+.I belts.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can
hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from
it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
~ wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
~~
js
extremely dangerous to ride
in
a cargo
area, inside or outside of
a vehicle.
In
a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do
not
allow people to ride
in
any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone
in
your vehicle
is
in
a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page
3-35.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You
never know
if
you’ll be in a crash.
If
you do have a
crash, you don’t know
if
it
will be a bad one.
1
-9
A
few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so
Why
Safety
Belts
Work
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, When you ride in or on anything,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk as it goes.
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than
30
years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter
...
a
lot!
you go as fast
I
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-10
Put
someone
on
it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-1
1
The person keeps going until stopped
by
something. In
a
real vehicle, it could be the windshield
...
or the instrument panel ...
1-12
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q:
Won’t
I
be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You
could
be
-
whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even
if
you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get
out,
is
much
greater
if
you are belted.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time
to
stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
Q:
If
my vehicle has air bags, why should
I
have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only;
so
they work with
safety belts
-
not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even
if
you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up
to
get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
i-13
Q:
If
I’m
a good driver, and
I
never drive far
from
home, why should
I
wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but
if
you’re in an
accident
-
even one that isn’t your fault
-
you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25
miles
(40
km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40
mph
(65
km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How
to Wear
Safety
Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children
on
page
7-29
or Infants and Young Children
on
page
7-37.
Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want
to
know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
1-14
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1.
Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat
so
you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats’’ in the Index.
4.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If
the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety
Belt
Extender on page
1-28.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had to.
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
5.
To
make the lap part tight, pull up
on
the
shoulder belt.
1-15
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should
go
over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks
if
there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or
if
you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
0:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is
too
loose.
It
won’t give nearly
as
much protection this way.
You can be seriously hurt
if
your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward
too
much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should
fit
against your body.
I
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The belt
is
buckled
in
the
wrong
place.
You can be ser
.---.,
..iju~
-_I
if your
.-
-It
is
buckled
in
the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go
up
over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
if
you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm.
In
a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also,
the belt would apply too much force
to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
I
A:
The shoulder belt
is
worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
-
-.
You can be seriously il
In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of
the belt to spread impact forces.
If
a
belt is
twisted, make it straight
so
it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix
it.
A:
The belt
is
twisted
across
the body.
1-20
1
To
unlatch the belt,
just
push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt
is
out
of the
way. If you slam the door
on
it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety
Belt
Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Likg all occupants, they are more likely
to
be
seriously injured
if
they don’t wear safety belts.
A
pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn
as
low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective
is
wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger
Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see
Driver
Position
on
page
1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt
-
except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature.
If
this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others
in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-22
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
All
rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s
how
to
wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt
is
pulled out all the way,
it will lock.
If
it
does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page
1-28.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had
to.
1.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate
to
make sure
it
is secure.
3.
To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-23
The lap part
of
the belt should be worn
low
and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If
you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts
of
the body are best able
to
take belt
restraining forces.
You can
k
seriously
h
t
if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-24
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children
and
Small
Adults
Your vehicle may already have this feature.
If
not, you
can get it from your
GM
dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each of the rear outside
passenger positions. Here’s how to attach the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just
push
the button on the buckle.
1-25
Vehicles With
No
Third
Row
1.
Slide the guide
off
of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
3.
Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt
and
the
guide on top.
2.
Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots
of
the guide.
1
-26
Vehicles With Both a Second and
Third
Row
4.
Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers
on
page
1-22.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To
remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together
so
that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1.
An elastic cord with a hook end is located in a
pocket on the side
of
the seatback. Remove the
guide from its pocket.
2.
Align the sliding comfort guide, located on the
shoulder belt, with the hook. Attach the hook to
the
loop
on
the sliding comfort guide.
1-27
3.
Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
4.
Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers
on
page
1-22.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
Safety Belt
Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But
if
a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
To remove and store the comfort guides, remove the
hook from the loop. Slide the guide back into its storage
pocket located on the side of the seatback.
1-28
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
I
Never do
this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces.
In
a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.
A
belt
must be used by only one person at
a
time.
Q: What
if
a child is wearing
a
lap-shoulder belt,
but the child
is
so small that the shoulder belt
is
very close to
the
child’s face or neck?
A:
If
the child is sitting in a seat next
to
a window,
move the child toward the center
of
the vehicle.
If
the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so
that
in
a
crash the child’s upper
body
would
have
the restraint the belts provide.
If
the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort
Guides
for
Children
and Small Adults on page
1-25.
1
-30
Never do
this.
Here a child is
sitting
in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt,
but
the shoulder part
is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in
this
way,
in
a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-31
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint. People should never hold
a
baby in their arms
while riding
in
a
vehicle.
A
baby doesn't weigh
much
--
until
a
crash. During
a
crash
a
baby
will become
so
heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only
25
mph
(40
km/h),
a
12-lb.
(5.5
kg) baby will suddenly
become a
240-lb.
(1
10 kg) force on
a
person's
arms.
A
baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-32
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Chlluren who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when
it
inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
1-33
Child
Restraint
Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain
or
position
a
child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A
rear-facing infant seat
(B)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and,
in
a crash,
acts
to
keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-35
A
forward-facing child seat
(C-E)
provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A
booster seat
(F-G)
is a child restraint designed to
improve the
fit
of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A
booster seat can also help
a
child to see out the
window.
1-36
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if
they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in
a rear outside seat position including an infant
riding
in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat.
Never
put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-fa lg child restri t can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a
rear seat outside position.
You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint
in
the right front seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
i
child restraint
in
a rear seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure
to
properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle
-
even when no child
is in it.
Top
Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it
to
work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If
yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If
the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-38
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap.
If
your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page
1-5.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location
TrailBlazer
Anchor brackets for the rear seat positions are located
on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle
(TrailBlazer only). Do not use the rear tie-down brackets
near the liftgate for top strap tethers.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. If it does,
you’ll find anchors (A) in the rear outside seat positions.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system will have
two
metal tabs where the seat
cushion meets the seatback.
In order
to
use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points
(B)
at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points
(B),
as shown here.
1
-40
With this system, use the
LATCH
system instead of the
vehicle’s safety
belts
to
secure
a
child restraint. See
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position on page
1-43.
1-41
If
a
LAT,.
I-type child restraint isn’t a,.,ched to
its
anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured
or
killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position” in the Index for information on how
to
secure
a
child restraint in your vehicle.
Securing
a
Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1.
Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to
use, where the bottom
of
the seatback meets the
back
of
the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3.
Attach the anchor points on the child restraint
to
the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4.
If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap
to
the top strap anchor. See
Top
Strap
on
page
7-38.
Tighten the top strap according
to
the child restraint instructions.
5.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions
to
be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the
top
tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-42
Securing
a
Child Restraint in
a
Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the
LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
on
page
1-40.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
Top
Strap
on
page
1-38
if
the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1.
Put the restraint on the seat.
2.
Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-43
3.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had
to.
4.
Pull the rest
of
the shoulder belt all the way out
of
the retractor to set the lock.
1
-44
5.
To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If
your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
on
page
1-40.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat.
Here’s why:
A
ct--.-.
--J
a rear-faci ~ child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap
on
page
1-38
if
the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as
the instructions say.
1.
2.
Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
air bag, always move the seat as far back as
it
will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats
on
page
1-2
or Manual Seats
on
page
1-2.
Put the restraint
on
the seat.
1-46
3.
Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned
so
you would be able
to
unbuckle the
safety belt quickly
if
you ever had
to.
1-47
Center
Seat
Position
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints
won’t work properly.
6.
To
tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful
to
use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions
to
be sure it is secure.
To
remove the child restraint,
just
unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-48
Air
Bag
Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has air bags
-
a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
air bag. Side impact air bags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
If
your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the
driver, the words AIR BAG will appear on the air bag
covering on the side of the driver’s seatback closest
to the door.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right
front passenger, the words
AIR
BAG will appear on the
air bag covering on the side of the right front
passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
1
-49
hits
the side of your vehicle.
T
y
arer
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly
-
whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
You can be severely injured or killed
in
a
era,.,
if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt
-
even
if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance
of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from
it.
Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts
but
don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only
in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate only
in
moderate
to
severe crashes where something
CAUTION: (Continued)
Bot11
lrontal and sidc mpact air bags
inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward,
it
could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for air bag inflation before and
during
a
crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with frontal air bags. The driver should sit
as
far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Front occupants should
not lean on or sleep against the door.
1-50
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that
a
child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle.
To
read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children”.
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you
if
there is an electrical
problem. See Air
Bag
Readiness Light on
page
3-35
for more information.
1-51
If
your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the
door.
If
your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact air bag
is
in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest
to
the door.
1-53
If
some
_...
ng
is
between an occupant and
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path
of
an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach
or
put anything on the
steering wheel hub or
on
or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When Should an
Air
Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate
to
severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed
to
inflate
only
if
the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
I
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19
to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment
is about 16
to
25 mph (26
to
40
km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that
it
can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems in the Index. Side impact air
bags are designed
to
inflate in moderate
to
severe
side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate
if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed
to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1
-54
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
The air bag system is designed
to
work properly under
a wide range
of
conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See
Of-Road
Driving with Your Four- Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page
4-14
for tips on off-road driving.
What Makes an
Air
Bag Inflate?
in an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release
of
gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
seatback closest
to
the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
How
Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate
to
severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate
to
severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to
safety belts, and
then only in moderate
to
severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-55
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps
off
by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough
to
inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed
to
inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there
to
help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
0
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records
speed, engine
RPM,
brake and throttle data.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-57
Servicing Your
Air
Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places For up to
10
seconds after the ignition key is
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service turned
off
and the battery is disconnected, an
manual have information about servicing your vehicle air bag can still inflate during improper
and the air bag systems.
To
purchase a service manual, service. You can be injured if you are close to
see Service Publications Ordering Information on an air bag when
it
inflates. Avoid yellow
page
7-10.
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do
so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After
a
Crash
I
I
A
crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle.
A
damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using
it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
ir
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But
if
the belts were stretched, as they would be
if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If
belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even
if
the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time
of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
1
-60
Section
2
Features and Controls
Keys
...............................................................
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
.........................
2.5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
...........
2.6
Doors and Locks
................................
.....
2.8
Door Locks
....................................................
2.8
Power Door Locks
..........................................
2.9
Delayed Locking
.............................................
2.9
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
............................
.......
2.10
Rear Door Security Locks
..........................
2.12
Lockout Protection
........................................
2.12
Leaving Your Vehicle
....................................
2.12
Liftgate/Liftglass
...........................................
2.13
Windows
........................................................
2.14
Power Windows
............................................
2-15
Sun Visors
..................................................
-2-1 6
Theft-Deterrent Systems
..................................
2.17
Content Theft-Deterrent
.................................
2.17
Passlock@
...................................................
2.18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
................
2-19
New Vehicle Break-In
....................................
2.19
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.20
Engine Coolant Heater
..................................
2.21
Automatic Transmission Operation
...................
2.22
Four-wheel Drive
..........................................
2.25
Parking Brake
..............................................
2.28
Shifting Into Park (P)
.....................................
2.28
Shifting Out of Park
(P)
..........
................
2.30
Parking Over Things That Burn
.......................
2-31
Engine Exhaust
............................................
2.31
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .... 2.32
Mirrors
...........................................................
2.34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStarB and Compass
..............................
2-34
Outside Manual Mirrors
..................................
2.35
Outside Power Mirrors
...................................
2.36
Outside Convex Mirror
...................................
2.36
Outside Heated Mirrors
..................................
2.37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist
..............................................
2.37
Ignition Positions
..........................................
2.19
2-
1
Section
2
Features and Controls
Onstar@ System
............................................
2.38 Luggage Carrier ....................................... 2.48
HomeLink@ Transmitter
..................................
2.40 Rear Floor Storage Lid
..................................
2.49
Programming the HomeLink@ Transmitter
........
2.41 Convenience Net
..........................................
2.49
Storage Areas
................................................
2.44 Cargo Cover
................................................
2.49
Glove
Box
...................................................
2.44 Sunroof
.........................................................
2.51
Overhead Console
........................................
2.44
Front Storage Area
..............
2.45 Vehicle Personalization 2.52
.................
...................................
Table
..................
.................................
2.47 Memory Seat
...............................................
2.52
2-2
Keys
I
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons.
A
child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
I
2-3
This vehicle has one
Nofice:
Your vehicle has a number of features that
double-sided key for the can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
ignition and door locks. trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
It
Will
fit with either side UP. your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in.
So
be sure you have
spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program
on
page
7-5.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@ system
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, Onstar@ may be able to send a command
When
a
new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to
have new ones made easily using this number.
Your selling dealer should also have this number.
to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStap System
on
page
2-38
for more information.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject
to
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part
15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject
to
the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At
times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or
if
you have
to
stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter
to
work, try this:
e
e
a
Check the distance.
You
may be too far from your
vehicle.
You
may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine
if
battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page
2-6.
If
you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet
(1
m) up to
30
feet
(9
m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
press unlock, the driver’s
door will unlock
automatically, the parking
lamps may flash and
the interior lights will
go on.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on
page
3-46.
8
(Lock):
Press lock
to
lock all the doors. Press lock
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
.&
(Panic): Press the horn symbol
to
make the horn
sound. The headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30
seconds. This can be turned
off
by pressing the
horn button again, by waiting for
30
seconds, or
by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s)
to
Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded
to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember
to
bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter
to
your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched
to
it.
2-6
Doors and
Locks
Door
Locks
1
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry system.
You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers
-
especially children
-
can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door
is
locked, the
handle won’t open
it.
You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in
a crash
if
the doors aren’t locked.
So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
vehicles may be unable
to
get out.
A
child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave
it.
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Young children who get into unlocked
Outsiders can easily enter through an
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside
by sliding the manual lever forward or rearward.
When the door is unlocked, you can see a red area
on the lever.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
2-8
Power Door
Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
Remove the ignition key and press the lock symbol
to
lock all of the doors at once. To unlock the doors, press
the other side of the switch.
Delayed
Locking
This feature makes it easier to use the power door locks
to
lock all the doors and the liftgate when leaving your
vehicle.
The first time you attempt
to
lock the doors using the
power lock switch or the remote keyless entry
transmitter (with any door or the liftgate open), three
chimes will signal that delayed locking is being used.
All
doors and the liftgate can be reopened for up
to
five
seconds from the time the
last
door is closed.
Five seconds after the
last
door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by
using the power door lock switch or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter a second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
lock the doors. The lockout prevention feature will
operate instead.
You can enable or disable the delayed locking feature.
If
the feature is disabled, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless
entry transmitter lock button is pressed.
Programming Delayed Locking
When your vehicle was shipped from the factory, the
delayed locking feature was programmed on, or
enabled. The mode to which your vehicle was
programmed may have been changed since it left the
factory. To turn the delayed locking feature on or off,
do
the following:
1.
Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
2.
Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
driver’s door in the lock position.
button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it would now be
off. If the feature was
off,
it would now be on.
2-9
Programmable Automatic
Door
Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you
to
program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode
1:
All
doors lock when the transmission is shifted
into gear.
Mode
2:
All
doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than
8
mph
(1
3
km/h).
Mode
3:
No
automatic door locking.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory
to
lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the three programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need
to
do the
following:
1.
Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signaVmultifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2.
Turn the key
to
RUN
and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signaVmultifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30
second program timer will begin.
3.
You are now ready
to
program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the three programming options
listed above, and press the lock side of the power
door lock switch
to
cycle through the lock options.
You will have
30
seconds
to
begin programming.
If you exceed the
30
second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp
twice to indicate that you have left the program
mode.
If
this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step
1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition
to
RUN.
The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode.
If
the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-1
0
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list
of
available programming
options:
Mode
1:
Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission
is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode
2:
All
doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode
3:
All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode
4:
No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock the driver’s door once the transmission
is shifted to PARK
(P).
The following instructions detail
how to program your door locks differently than the
factory setting. Choose one of the four programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1.
Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signaVmultifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2.
3.
Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30
second program timer will begin.
You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have
30
seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the
30
second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the
horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step
1
to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the IocWunlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-1
1
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature, You can lock the
rear doors
so
they can’t be opened from the inside
by passengers.
To
use one of these locks do the
following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
security lock lever located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
.
..
.
2.
Move the lever down to
engage the safety lock.
Move the lever up to
disengage the
safety lock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
If
you want
to
open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock
the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the lock from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
3.
Close the door.
4.
Do
the same thing to the other rear door
2-1 2
Liftgate/Liftglass
It
can be dangerous to ,:ive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see
or
smell
CO.
It
can cause unconsciousness
and even death. If you must drive with the
liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
0
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Controls”
in the Index.
If
you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Liftgate Release
To
unlock the liftgate, you may use the power door
locks or the keyless entry system described earlier.
On some vehicles the liftglass will also unlock when the
liftgate is unlocked. Press the pushbutton
on
the
liftglass to open it.
To
open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the liftgate.
If
you open the liftgate, the
liftgate module will lock the liftglass after a one to two
second delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1.
Remove the trim plug to expose the access hole in
2.
Use a
tool
to reach through the access hole in the
3.
Pry
the left release lever up to the unlock position.
4.
Reattach the trim plug.
the trim panel.
trim panel.
Pry
the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
2-1
3
Windows
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous.
A
child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-1
4
Power
Windows
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. The driver’s door has a switch for each of
the passenger’s windows
as
well.
Press the bottom of the switch to lower the window.
Press the top of the switch
to
raise the window.
3-1
5
Express-Down Window
The driver’s and front passenger’s window switches
have an express-down feature that allows you to lower
the window without holding the switch down. Press
the bottom of the driver’s window switch down briefly
to
activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the
switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing
the top of the switch.
Window Lockout
Your vehicle has a lockout feature
to
prevent
passengers from operating the power windows.
A
small
light in the lockout switch will come on
to
show that
the switch has been activated. Press the lockout switch
again to return
to
normal operation.
Sun
Visors
To block out glare, you can pull the visor down.
You can also slide the visor from side-to-side to cover
the driver or passenger front window.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on
the lamps.
2-1
6
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number
of
theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible
to
steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
SECURITY
United
States
4
Canada
Here’s how
to
operate the system:
1.
Open the door,
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The
SECURITY light should flash.
3.
Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go
off
after approximately
30
seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for
30
seconds, then will turn
off
to
save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate
if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only
if
you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key
if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how
to
avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If
you don’t want
to
activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key
affer
the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop
if
you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-1
7
Testing
the
Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1.
From inside the vehicle,'Iower the driver's window
and open the driver's door.
2.
Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3.
Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the SECURITY light
to
go out.
4.
Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set
off
the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see
if
the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page
5-85.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
Passlock@
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock@ theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@ enables fuel
if
the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key
is
not used or the
ignition lock cylinder
is
tampered with, the fuel system
is disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will
turn
off
approximately five seconds after the key is
turned
to
RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about
10
minutes until the light
stops
flashing before
trying
to
restart the engine. Remember to release the
key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If
the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine
if
you turn
the engine off. However, your Passlock@ system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock@ at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on
page
5-85.
See your
dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page
7-5.
2-1
a
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New
Vehicle
Break-In
Notice:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But
it
will perform better in the long run
if
you follow these guidelines:
@
0
Keep your speed at
55
mph
(88
km/h) or less for
the first
500
miles
(805
km).
Don’t drive at any one speed
-
fast or
slow
-
for the first
500
miles
(805
km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200
miles
(322
km) or
so.
During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken
in.
Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
a
Trailer” in the Index for more information.
Ignition
Positions
C
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A
(LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You
will
only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to
LOCK.
2-1
9
Notice:
If
your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn
it,
be sure you are using the correct key; if
so,
is
it
all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force
it
could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B
(ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice:
Don’t operate accessories
in
the
ACCESSORY position for long periods of time.
Prolonged operation of accessories in the
ACCESSORY position could drain your battery and
prevent you from starting your vehicle.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained
Accessory
Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of
your vehicle to continue to work up to
20
minutes
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (option) and
overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
RUN to LOCK, these features will continue to work for
up to
20
minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your
engine won’t start in any other position-that’s a safety
feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)
if
your
vehicle
is
moving.
If
you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1.
With your foot
off
the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice:
Holding your key
in
START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor.
At
15 seconds,
the
starter will automatically be disengaged. Wait
about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2.
If it doesn’t start within
10
seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let
go
of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about
15
seconds between each try.
2-20
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below
0°F
or -18”C),
do
this:
1.
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15
seconds. When the engine starts, let go
of
the key.
2.
If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go
of
the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice:
Your engine is designed
to
work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have this feature. In very cold
weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior
to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant heater is not
required.
To
Use
the
Engine
Coolant
Heater
1.
Turn off the engine.
2.
Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
3.
Plug it into a normal, grounded
1
10-Volt AC outlet.
2-2
1
Plu
JnL cord into an ung ded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If
the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as
it
was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It’s
the best position to use when
you
start the engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
It
is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to.
If
you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)”
in
the
Index.
If
you’re pulling
a
trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
2-22
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If
you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than about
35
mph
(55
km/h), push the
Going about
35
mph
(55
km/h) or more, push the
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD
(3)
or,
if
necessary, a lower gear selection
if
the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD
(3):
This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND
(2):
This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD
(3).
You can use
SECOND
(2)
on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use the brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND
(2)
for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
accelerator all the way down.
FIRST
(1):
This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If
the
selector lever is put in FIRST
(1)
while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle
is
going slowly enough.
Notice:
If
your wheels won’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You
could damage your transmission.
Also,
if you
stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there
with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat
and damage the transmission. Use your brakes
or shift into
PARK
(P)
to hold your vehicle in
position on a hill.
Shift
Lock Release
This vehicle is equipped with a shift lock release
system. If your vehicle has a dead battery and you need
to have your vehicle towed, there is a shift lock
release lever that will allow you to move the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
To access the shift lock release lever, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press on the sides of the boot around the shift
lever to release the boot.
Lift up the boot on the shift lever and you will see
an orange lever.
Lift the orange lever up and move the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
Snap the shift lever boot back in place.
2-24
Four-wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power
to
all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use two-wheel drive high
(2HI)
for most
normal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving in the 4-WHEEL
HIGH
(4HI) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4LO) positions for a long time on
dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of
your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle is equipped
with the automatic transfer
case, the transfer case
knob
is
located
to
the right
of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Use this
knob to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
2HI (Two-Wheel High): This setting
is
for driving in
most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive. It also provides the best
fuel economy.
A4WD (Automatic Four-wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road conditions are variable.
When driving your vehicle in A4WD, the front axle is
engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent
to
the
rear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of traction,
the system will automatically engage four-wheel
drive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel
economy than 2HI.
4HI (Four-wheel High): Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle.
4LO (Four-wheel Low): This setting also engages
your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never
need 4LO.
It
sends maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose 4LO
if
you are driving off-road in
deep sand, deep mud, and climbing or descending
steep hills.
2-25
Shifting the tr-..sfer c---e tl-
.
._
JTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even
if
the
transmission is in PARK
(P).
You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in
the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
on page
4-42
for more
information.
An indicator light in the knob will show you which
position the transfer case is in. The indicator lights will
come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and
one will stay on.
If
the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle
to
your dealer for service. An
indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case.
It
will remain illuminated when the shift is complete.
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If
the SERVICE 4WD light on the instrument panel
cluster stays on, you should take your vehicle
to
your
dealer for service. See Service Four-wheel Drive
Warning Light
on
page
3-44
for further information.
Shifting into 4HI
or
A4WD
Turn the knob to 4HI or A4WD. This can be done at any
speed and the indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete.
Shifting into 2HI
Turn the knob
to
2Hl. This can be done at any speed.
Shifting into 4LO
To shift
to
4L0, the vehicle’s engine must be running
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less
than
2
mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into
4LO
is
to
have your vehicle moving
1
or
2
mph
(1.6
to
3.2 km/h). Turn the knob
to
4LO. You must wait
for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.
If you turn the knob
to
4L0 when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4L0 indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After
30
seconds, the
transfer case will return
to
the setting last chosen.
2-26
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and pull up on the parking
brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system
warning light will come on.
Notices
Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your parking brake to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If
you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hili,
see Towing
a
Trailer on
page
4-47.
That section
shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
To
release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
I
It
can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever is not fully
in
PARK
(P)
with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly.
You
or others
could be injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. With four-wheel
CAUTION:
(Continued)
2-28
dril
,
yc vehicle le free to
roll
-
even if
your shift lever
is
in
PARK (P)
-
if your
transfer case
is
in NEUTRAL.
So,
be sure the
transfer case is
in
a
drive gear
-
not
in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-wheel Drive”
in
the
Index. Always put the shift lever fully
in
PARK
(P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you’re
pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”
in
the Index.
1.
Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2.
Move the shift lever into PARK (P).
Press the button in on the side of the lever.
Push the lever all the way toward the front of the
vehicle.
3.
Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4.
Remove the key and take it with you.
You
know
your vehicle is in PARK (P)
if
the key can be
removed from the ignition.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
It
can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the
shift
lever
is
not fully
in
PARK
(P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll
--
even if your lever
is
in
PARK
(P)
--
if your transfer case is
in
NEUTRAL.
So
be sure the transfer case is
in
a drive gear
--
not NEUTRAL. See ‘‘Four-wheel Drive
(Automatic Transfer Case)”
in
the Index.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running,
it
could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
If
you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle
is
in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
2-29
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if
you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you (or pressing the button on a console
shift lever).
If
you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque
Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult
to
pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK
(P)
properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting lnto Park
(P)
on
page 2-28.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park
(P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page
2-22.
If
you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1.
Turn the key to LOCK.
2.
Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step
4.
3.
Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4.
Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust
Things that can burn could .,dch
,at
exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill.
It
contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t
see or smell.
It
can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in
if:
0
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
0
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
different.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If
you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive
it
only with all the windows down to
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
blow out any
CO;
and
2-31
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not
to
park with the engine running. But
if
you
ever ve
to,
here are some thin< ‘to know.
’
/r\
CAUTION:
-
Idling the engine with the climate control
system
off
could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.’’
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if
the fan is at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust
-
with
CO
-
can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
“Winter Driving”
in
the Index.
It
can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK
(P)
with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
2-32
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will
be free
to
roll
-
even
if
your shift lever is in
PARK (P)
-
if your transfer case
is
in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear
-
not in NEUTRAL. See
“Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer case)”
in the Index.
Follow
the proper steps
to
be sure your vehicle
won’t
move. See Shifting
into
Park (P) on page
2-28.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page
4-47.
2-33
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStarB and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and the Onstar@ system.
&
(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass.
There are three additional buttons for the Onstar@
system. See your dealer for more information on
the system and how
to
subscribe to Onstar@ .
See
OnStap
System
on
page
2-38
for more information
about the services Onstar@ provides.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims
to
the
proper
behind
2-34
level
to
minimize glare from any headlamps
you after dark.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on and off by
pressing the far left button, located on the lower
part
of
the mirror face, for up to three seconds. A light
on the mirror will be lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays
a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”
is displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to
activate the compass calibration mode. “CAL” will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of
two
ways:
0
Drive the vehicle in circles at
5
mph
(8
km/h) or less
until the display shows “CAL”, or
drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
(This method may take longer to calibrate.)
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It
will be
necessary
to
adjust the compass
to
compensate for
compass variance
if
you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary
to
adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1.
Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
2.
Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when
“ZONE”
is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
3.
Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your zone
number, release the button. After about four
seconds, the mirror will return
to
the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
Outside
Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors
so
you can see a little of the
side
of
your vehicle.
Fold the mirrors in before entering a car wash.
To
do
this, pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the
mirrors back
out
when finished.
2-35
Outside Power Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode. This
action is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go
no further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by
moving the knob in the opposite direction.
When the knob is twisted
to
the center position, the
mirrors can not be moved with the control knob.
Outside
Convex
Mirror
A convex mirror’s surface is curved
so
you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
The control
is
located on the driver’s door.
1.
Twist the knob toward the mirror you desire
to
adjust.
2.
Move the knob in the direction you want the
mirror to
go
3.
Adjust the mirror in all four directions.
4.
After you are satisfied with the position of the
mirror, twist the knob to the center position or twist it
to the other mirror
to
adjust that mirror.
A
convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If
you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror
or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature.
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors
to
help clear them of ice, snow
and condensation.
Outside Automatic
Dimming
Mirror
with Curb View Assist
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s and/or
passenger’s outside mirror will adjust
to
a preset tilt
position while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb
view assist may be useful when you are parallel
parking. The mirror(s) will return
to
normal position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(R)
gear.
Automatic mirror movement in either direction will follow
a short delay.
To first activate this feature, perform the following steps:
1.
Press the Personalization button, located on the
steering wheel, until “Tilt Mirror in REVERSE (R)”
is displayed on the DIC display.
2.
Press the Select button once
to
select the
passenger’s side mirror, twice for the driver’s side
mirror and three times for both mirrors. Then
press the Personalization button repeatedly until the
display goes blank.
3.
With the engine running, engage the parking brake,
press the brake pedal and place the vehicle in
REVERSE
(R)
gear.
4. Adjust the passenger’s side and then the driver’s
side outside mirrors
to
the desired tilt positions.
These positions will be stored into memory once the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is placed in
PARK
(P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror(s) will return
to
normal
driving position, following a short delay.
To change the
tilt
position, adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear with the engine running,
the parking brake engaged and the brake pedal
pressed. The new position will be saved into memory
once the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R).
2-37
Onstar@
System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Onstar@ System.
Onstar@ uses global positioning system
(GPS)
satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state
of
the art
call centers
to
provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information and convenience services. An
Onstar@ subscription plan is included in the price of your
vehicle. You can easily upgrade or extend your Onstar@
services
to
meet your personal needs.
A complete Onstar@ user’s guide and the terms and
conditions
of
the Onstar@ Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your Onstar@ -equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact Onstar@ at
1
-888-4-ONSTAR
(1
-888-466-7827), or press the blue Onstar@ button
to speak to an Onstar@ advisor
24
hours a day,
7
days
a week.
Onstar@ Services
Onstar@ provides a number
of
service plans to closely
meet your needs. Some of the services currently
provided by Onstar@ are:
Automatic Notification
of
Air Bag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock
Remote Diagnostics
Onstar@ MED-NET (Requires separate activation
and annual fee on some plans)
Online and Personal Concierge Services
Route Support
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
2-38
Onstar@ Personal Calling
With Onstar@ Personal Calling, you have a safer way
to stay connected while driving.
It’s
a hands-free
wireless phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You
can place calls nationwide using voice-activated
dialing with no contracts, no roaming charges and no
access fees. To find out more about Onstar@ Personal
Calling, refer
to
the Onstar@ owner’s guide in your
vehicle’s glove box, or call Onstar@ at
1
-888-4-ONSTAR
(1
-888-466-7827).
Onstar@ Virtual Advisor
With Onstar@ Virtual Advisor you can listen
to
your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports,
stock
quotes and
sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of Onstar@ services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for Onstar@ Personal
Calling and Onstar@ Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-39
HomeLink@ Transmitter
HomeLink@ , a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way
to
replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used
to
activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink@ information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-351 5.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink@
Transmitter, it complies with Part
15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject
to
the following
two
conditions:
(1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject
to
the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to
use this equipment.
2-40
Programming the
HomeLink@
Transmitter
Do
not use the HomeLink@ Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink@ programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink@ buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink@
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink@ on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised
to
park outside
of the garage.
It
is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps
to
program up
to
three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins
to
flash, after
20
seconds.
Do
not hold down the
1-800-355-351
5.
buttons for longer than
30
seconds and do not
repeat this step
to
program a second and/or third
transmitter
to
the remaining two HomeLink@
buttons.
2.
Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about
1
to
3 inches (3
to
8 cm) away from the
HomeLink@ buttons while keeping the indicator light
in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLinkO and the hand-held
transmitter button.
Do
not release the buttons until
Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you
to
substitute Step
3
with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming’’ later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink@ successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@
button and observe the indicator light.
If
the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLinkO button is pressed and
released.
2-41
To program the remaining two HomeLink@ buttons,
begin with Step
2
under “Programming
HomeLink@
.”
Do
not repeat Step
1
as this will
erase all of the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns
to
a
constant light, continue with
Steps
6
through
8
following
to
complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6.
At
the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7.
Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have
30
seconds
to
start Step
8.
8.
Return
to
the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink@ button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to
complete the programming.
HomeLink@ should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@ buttons,
begin with Step
2
of “Programming HomeLink@ .”
Do
not repeat Step
1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink@
to
pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some
U.S.
gate operators are manufactured
to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink@
”
procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step
3
under “Programming
HomeLink@
”
with the following:
Continue
to
press and hold the HomeLink@ button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by HomeLink@
.
The indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed
with Step
4
under “Programming HomeLink@”
to
complete.
2-42
Using Homebink@
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink@ button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink@ Buttons
To
erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1.
Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
2.
Release both buttons.
Do
not hold for longer than
the indicator light begins to flash, after
20
seconds.
30 seconds.
HomeLink@ is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2
under “Programming HomeLink@ .”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink@ Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@
Button
To
program a device to HomeLink@ using a HomeLink@
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink@ button.
Do not release the button.
2.
The indicator light will begin to flash after
20
seconds. While still holding the HomeLink@
button, proceed with Step
2
under “Programming
HomeLink@
.’7
Resetting Defaults
Po
reset HomeLink@ to default settings do the following:
1.
Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20
seconds until the indicator light begins
to
flash.
2.
Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink@
indicator light turns
off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink@ at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-43
Storage Areas
Glove
Box
To
open your glove box, pull the handle on the front of
the glove box and lower the door.
Overhead Console
..
.
The overhead console
includes sunglasses
storage, a HomeLink@
transmitter and a
travel note recorder
(if
equipped). If your
vehicle has a third row
seat, the rear quarter glass
switches are also located
in the overhead console.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
To
open the sunglasses storage compartment in the
overhead console, press the release button. Then pull
the compartment down.
Travel Note Recorder
These switches allow
the driver
to
open
and close each third row
seat window separately.
Your vehicle may have this feature.
To
record a message, press the button with the circle
on it and begin speaking. Press the button with the circle
on it again
to
stop recording.
You may also press and hold the button with the circle
on it while you are speaking and then let it go when
you are finished.
To
play back messages, press the button with the right
arrow on it. Pressing the right arrow button more
than once will return you to previously recorded
2-44
messages. If you press and hold this button for more
than one second, all of the recorded messages will
be played back.
To delete messages, press the button with the square
on it while the message is playing.
If
you press and hold
the right arrow button and the circle button at the
same time for a half of a second, all of the messages
will be deleted.
Front Storage Area
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top
to
open it. You
can store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in
front of the compartment.
Your vehicle’s console will be equipped with cupholders
located on the front and rear of the storage
compartment.
The console may also contain one or more of the
following components:
*
Rear Seat Audio Controls
*
Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
Rear Climate Control
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover
to
expose the storage area which includes
slots
for cassettes or compact discs.
Rear Compartment Storage
PanelKover
Upper
Position
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Insert the front corners of the panel into the top guides
and slide the panel forward. Press down on the back
of the panel
to
lock it in place. This acts as a cargo
shade.
2-45
lou were to carry things on the adj table
shelf when
it
is in the upper (cargo cover)
position, then during a sudden vehicle
movement or a crash those things could be
thrown around in the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. When
it
is in the upper
position, always secure any cargo on the floor
beneath the shelfkover.
Lower Position
Insert the front corners of the panel into the lower
guides and slide the panel forward. Press down on
the back of the panel
to
lock
it
in place.
To
prevent
soiling the carpet, the panel may be installed either
side up.
Notice:
To
help avoid damage, do not load objects
over
200
Ibs.
(90
kg)
in
this position. Failure to
follow this warning could damage the shelf.
2-46
Vertical Position
Insert the front corners of the panel into the vertical
guides behind the seatbacks and slide the panel down.
Plastic grocery bags can be attached
to
the hooks
on the panel.
Notice:
When in vertical position, the shelf panel
should not be used
as
a barrier for large objects in
the cargo area when the seatbacks are folded
down.
Table
Your vehicle may be equipped with a table. The
maximum load for the table
is
200
Ibs.
(90
kg).
To
set up the table:
1.
Remove the table from its stowed location
in
the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the cover
3.
Open the four legs on the underside of the table
base.
A
leg
is
fully extended when the leg latch
snaps into place.
Use the table base on level ground only.
To take down the table, do the following:
1.
Press in the latch
to
disengage it from each leg.
Completely fold each leg under the base.
2.
Reinstall the cover.
3.
Return the table
to
its
stowed location.
2-47
Luggage Carrier
If you try to carry something on top
of
your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier
-
like paneling, plywood,
a
mattress
and
so
forth
-
the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control.
What
you are carrying could be
violently torn
off,
and this could cause you or
other drivers to have
a
collision, and
of
course
damage your vehicle. You may be able
to
carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
A
luggage carrier allows you
to
load things on top of
your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attached
to
the roof, sliding crossrails (if equipped) and places
to
use for tying things down. These let you load
some other things on top of your vehicle, as long as
they are not wide or longer than the luggage carrier.
To
slide the crossrails
to
where you want them, pull up
on the lever on each side of the crossrail. This will
release the crossrail and allow you
to
slide it. When the
crossrail is where you want
it,
press down on the
levers
to
lock it into place.
Notice:
Loading cargo that weighs more than
220
Ibs.
(100
kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading
Your
Vehicle on
page
4-45.
To
prevent damage or
loss
of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is
locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier
is
not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for wind noise
reduction. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of
the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening
of the rear door.
2-48
Rear Floor Storage
Lid
If
any removable convenience item isn’t
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured.
Be
sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle has a rear floor storage lid located in
the rear cargo area that allows you
to
put items
underneath it.
To
remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1.
Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly
to
unhook it.
3.
Pull the lid toward you
to
release it from the forward
mounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure
to
the latch until you hear it click.
Convenience
Net
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle
to
help keep small items, like gloves and
light clothing, in place during sharp turns or quick stops
and starts.
The net is not designed
to
retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1.
Attach the upper loops
to
the retainers on either
side of the liftgate opening. The label should be in
the upper passenger’s side corner, visible from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Attach the lower hooks
to
the rear cargo tie downs
on the floor.
Cargo Cover
If
your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it
to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1.
Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
2.
Compress the opposite endcap, align it with the
located behind the rear seat.
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3.
Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to
secure it.
2-49
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1.
Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
2.
Compress one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3.
Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap
so
that you can remove the shade from the veWe.
Cargo
Tie
Downs
There may be cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you
to strap cargo in and keep
it from moving.
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during
a
collision or
sudden maneuver.
You
or others could be
injured.
If
you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that is securely
reattached.
2-50
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power
sliding sunroof.
To
open or close your sunroof,
the ignition
must
be on or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active.
Press and release the back of the button in the overhead
console to open the sunroof. Press the front of the
button to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof is closed,
press the forward side of the button to open the
sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you
can pull forward
to
block sun rays.
2-51
Vehicle
Personalization
Memory
Seat
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The controls are
located on the driver’s
door, and are used
to
program and recall
memory settings for the
driver’s seating and
outside mirror positions.
e
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback recliner
and lumbar) and both of the outside mirrors
to
the
desired position. Then press and hold button
1
(for driver
1)
for
three seconds. A double chime will
sound
to
let you know that the position has been stored.
A second mirror and seating position can be
programmed by repeating the procedure with a second
driver and pressing button 2 for three seconds. Each
time button
1
or
2
is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in
PARK
(P),
a single chime will sound,
and the memory position will be recalled.
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter
to
enter your vehicle, the preset
driver’s seat and mirror positions will be recalled
if
programmed to do so through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The numbers on the back of the
transmitters,
1
or
2,
correspond
to
the numbers on
the memory controls.
2-52
The seat and mirror positions can also be recalled by
placing the key in the ignition
if
programmed to do
so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls or
memory buttons.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driver’s position (by pressing
1
or
2),
then
positioning the seat in the desired exit position for
that driver. Press and hold the button with the exit
symbol for three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored. With
the vehicle in PARK
(P),
the exit position for that driver
can be recalled by pressing the exit button. The
mirrors, power lumbar and recline positions will not be
stored or recalled for the exit positions.
If
no exit position
is stored, the default is all the way rearward.
Further programming for automatic seat and mirror
movement can be done through the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
You
may choose to either select or
not select the following:
Automatic seat and mirror movement when the
vehicle is unlocked with the remote keyless entry,
automatic seat and mirror movement when a key is
placed in the ignition, and
automatic seat movement to the exit position when
the vehicle is
in
PARK
(P).
2-53
Section
3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ............................... 3.4
Hazard Warning Flashers
................................
3.5
Other Warning Devices
...................................
3.6
Horn ............................................................. 3.6
Tilt Wheel
.....................................................
3.6
Turn SignaVMuItifunction Lever
.........................
3-7
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.13
Interior Lamps
.............................................
-3-1 6
Accessory Power Outlets
................
....... 3.18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
........................
3.18
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.19
Dual Climate Control System .......................... 3.19
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ........... 3.22
Rear Climate Control System ......................... 3.27
Steering Wheel Climate Controls
.....................
3.31
Climate Controls Personalization
.....................
3.31
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
.............
3.32
Instrument Panel Cluster
................................
3.33
Tachometer
.................................................
3.34
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.34
Safety Belt Reminder Light
.............................
3-35
Air Bag Readiness Light
................................
3-35
Charging System Light
..................................
3-36
Voltmeter Gage
............................................
3-36
Brake System Warning Light ....................... 3-37
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............... 3.38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
.............................
3.39
Oil Pressure Gage
........................................
3.41
Change Engine Oil Light
................................
3-42
Security Light
...............................................
3-42
Cruise Control Light
......................................
3-43
Reduced Engine Power Light
.........................
3.43
Service Four-wheel Drive
Warning Light
........................................
3.44
Check Gages Warning Light
...........................
3.44
Gate Ajar Light
.............................................
3.44
Fuel Gage
...................................................
3.45
Low Fuel Warning Light
.................................
3-45
Warning Light
...............................
.....
3.38
Section
3
Instrument
Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.......................
3.46
DIC Operation and Displays
...........................
3.46
DIC Warnings and Messages
.........................
3.54
Audio
System(s)
.............................................
3.58
Setting the Time
...........................................
3-58
Radio with CD
..............................................
3-59
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3-65
Radio with Six-Disc CD
.................................
3-74
Rear Seat Entertainment System
....................
3-83
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
.................................
3-93
Radio Personalization
....................................
3-94
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
...........................................
3-94
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
.......................
3.95
DVD Distortion
.............................................
3.95
Understanding Radio Reception
......................
3.95
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
.................
3-96
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
.........................
3-97
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
...................
3-97
Fixed Mast Antenna
......................................
3-97
Cleaning the Video Screen
.............................
3-97
Chime Level Adjustment
................................
3-97
3-2
3
m
The main components of your instrument panel
are the following:
A. Exterior Lamp Controls
B.
Air Outlets
C. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
D.
Instrument Panel Cluster
E.
Ignition Switch
F.
Transfer Case Controls or Traction Control Button
G. Rear Window WasherMiper
H.
Audio System
I.
Climate Controls
J.
Hood Release
K.
Ashtray
L.
Shift Lever
M. Lighter
N.
Accessory Power Outlet
0.
Rear Window Defogger
P. Glove Box
Hazard Warning Flashers
. .
..:,.;
..
. .
.
...
.
.
,
*.
.:
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
off.
3-5
The button for the hazard
warning flashers is located
on top of the steering
column.
Horn
To
sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even
if
the key isn’t in.
Press the button all the way down to make your front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and
off.
To turn
off the flashers, press the button again until it clicks and
then release it.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about
300
feet
(I00
m) behind your
vehicle.
You should adjust the
steering wheel before you
drive. The tilt lever is
located on the driver’s side
of the steering column,
under the turn signal lever.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To
tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do
not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
00
:
Turn and Lane Change Signals
a
:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
:
Windshield Wipers
8
:
Windshield Washer
:
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to
signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn
is
finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may
also
be equipped with lane change
indicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change,
if
the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
3-7
If a bulb is burned out, replace it
to
help avoid an
accident.
If
the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses
and
Circuit Breakers
on
page
5-85
and check for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher
is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
flash even
if
a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn
Signal
On
Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than
3/4
of a mile
(1.2
km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal.
To
turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever
to
the
off
position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low
to
high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
to
signal a driver in front of you that you want
to
pass.
It
works even
if
your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever
to
return
to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band
to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
3-8
0
(Off):
To
stop the wipers, move the band
to
off.
(Windshield Wipers): Turn the band
to
control the
windshield wipers.
You
can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer
to
the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from
you
to
the first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second
solid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,
move the band
to
off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen
to
the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If
your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
RainsenseTM Wipers
Your vehicle may be equipped with
RainsenseTM windshield wipers. When active, these
wipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
The moisture sensor is located next to the inside
rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield.
To turn on the RainsenseTM feature, the wipers must be
set
to
one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each
of
the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the rainsensor. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings
located closer
to
off
on the multifunction lever.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according
to
the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
Notice:
Turn the windshield wiper band on the
multifunction lever to
off
to avoid wiper damage
when going through an automatic car wash.
Windshield Washer
(Windshield Washer):
To
spray washer fluid on the
windshield, press the windshield washer paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return
to
your preset speed.
In
1-
-ezing weather, don ~
me
your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-9
0
(Off): This position turns the cruise control system
off
and cancels memory of a set speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of
about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph
(40
km/h).
If
you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
I
0
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So,
don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
0
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If
you leave your cruise control
on
when you’re
not using cruise, you might
hit
a button and
go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch
off
until you want to use
cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
1.
Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up
to
the speed you want.
3.
Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release
it.
4.
Take your
foot
off the accelerator pedal.
The accelerator pedal will
not
go down.
3-1
1
CRUISE
United States Canada
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on when the cruise control
is
engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off
the cruise control. But you don’t need
to
reset it.
Once you’re going about
25
mph
(40
km/h)
or
more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake.
So
unless you want
to
go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are
two
ways
to
go to a higher speed:
0
Use the accelerator pedal
to
get
to
the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise
at
the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from on
to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up
to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To
increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly
to
resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Press in the set button at the end
of
the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To
slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll
go
about
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) slower.
3-1
2
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal
to
increase your speed.
When you take your foot
off
the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down
to
the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on
Mills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want
to
step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have
to
brake or shift
to
a lower gear
to
keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you
out
of
cruise control. Many
drivers find this
to
be
too
much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways
to
turn off the cruise control:
0
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
0
Move the cruise switch to off, or
0
Shift the transmission
to
NEUTRAL
(N).
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory
is
erased.
Exterior
Lamps
Your exterior lamps knob
is located on your
instrument panel
to
the left
of the steering wheel.
/
(Off): Turn the knob to this symbol and release it to
turn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the
automatic headlamps. An indicator will illuminate when
the position is selected.
:::.
(Automatic
DRUAHL):
Turning the knob
to
this
symbol puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
An indicator will illuminate when the position is
selected.
...
3-1
3
:oo:
(Parking
Lamps):
Turn the knob
to
this symbol
to
manually turn on the following:
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
3
Instrument Panel Lights
/
Zo
(Headlamps): Turn the knob
to
this symbol
to
turn
on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel. Be sure
it
is not covered or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems,
so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change
to
DRL
if
it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake,
shift out of park or turn the exterior lamp control
to
the off position as described in “Exterior Lamps”.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door
is open and your ignition is in LOCK or ACCESSORY.
To turn the tone off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK.
3-1
4
Daytime
Running
Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others
to
see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come
on at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode,
the light sensor detects daytime light, and
the transmission is not in
PARK
(P).
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins
to
get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL
to
the regular headlamps.
Fog
Lamps
Your vehicle may have this
for better vision in foggy or
ignition must be in RUN for
feature. Use your fog lamps
misty conditions. Your
your fog lamps
to
work.
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel
to
the right of
the exterior lamps knob.
Press the button
to
turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off.
A
light will glow near the
button when the fog lamps are on. Fog lamps will
turn off whenever your high-beam headlamps are on.
3-1
5
Interior
Lamps
instrument Panel Brightness
Press the knob located
next
to
the exterior lamps
knob
to
extend it. Adjust
the instrument panel lights.
Turn the knob all the
way up
to
turn on
the interior lamps. Press
the knob back into its
stored position when
you’re not using it.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override button
is located below the
exterior lamps knob.
To turn the dome lamps
off,
press the button. The dome
lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
override the illuminated entry feature unless you
use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps
to
automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come
on
when
you open a door.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on
if
the dome override button
is
in the “out” position.
When all the doors are closed, the lamps will stay on for
a short period of time and will then turn
off
automatically.
3-1
6
If you use your keyless entry transmitter
to
unlock the
vehicle, the interior lights will come on for a short
time whether or not the dome override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition
to
help you
see while exiting the vehicle. With the dome override
button in the
“out”
position, these lights will stay on for
a
short period of time and then will go
out.
Reading Lamps
Press the lens on the lamp located above the doors
to
turn the reading lamps
on
and off.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next
to
the exterior lamps knob, all
the way up
to
the top detent position. In this position,
the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity, and
reading lamps
if
they are left on for more than
20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep your
battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary
to
do one of the following
to
return
to
normal operation:
Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
turn the ignition key
to
RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances,
if
they are left on.
If you would like
to
turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.
3-1
7
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets. With
the accessory power outlets, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB
radio.
The first outlet is located
to
the right of the cigarette
lighter on the instrument panel. The second outlet
is located on the rear
of
the center console.
Remove the cover from the outlet
to
use the outlet.
Be sure
to
put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience
a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on
the accessory power outlets.
Notice:
Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage
it
or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice:
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type
of
accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Ashtrays
and
Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have this feature. The front ashtray is
removable and fits into the front cupholder.
Notice:
Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes
or
other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
To remove the front ashtray, pull the covered bin out of
the cupholder.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready,
it
will pop back out
by
itself.
Notice:
Don’t hold
a
cigarette lighter in with your
hand while
it
is heating.
If
you do,
it
won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make
it
overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
3-1
8
Climate
Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
@
(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise
to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
If
the knob is in
off
outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can still be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
Turn the right knob clockwise
or
counterclockwise
to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
;j'
(Vent): This mode directs air
to
the instrument
panel outlets.
rf;'
(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
to
the instrument panel outlets; then directs most of
the remaining air
to
the floor outlets.
A
little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed
to
the upper vents
and warmer air
to
the floor outlets.
tg
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air
to
the
floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected while in floor mode.
(Recirculation): Recirculation mode is used
to
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. When this
button is pressed, an indicator light in the button
will come on
to
let you know that it is active. Use this
mode
to
help prevent outside odors and/or dust
from entering your vehicle or
to
help cool the air inside
of your vehicle more quickly. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode, the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the blend or defrost mode and increase
fan speed. Recirculation mode shuts off when the
engine is turned off.
3-1
9
Temperature Control
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate
control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature
on the driver’s side
of
the vehicle. Slide the lever
up or down
to
adjust the temperature.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the
climate control panel is used to raise or lower the
temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Slide the lever up or down
to
adjust the temperature.
This lever also adjusts the temperature
to
the rear
seat outlets.
When the temperature outside
is
0°F
(-18°C)
or lower,
use the engine coolant heater,
if
equipped,
to
provide
warmer faster
to
your vehicle.
a
(Air Conditioning): Press this button
to
turn the
air-conditioning system on or
off.
When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on and the
system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside
of your vehicle. You may notice
a
slight change in
engine performance when the air conditioning
compressor shuts off and turns on again.
This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized
if
the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes
to
choose from
to
clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode
to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode
to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to
select one of the following modes:
+3
(Defog): This mode directs the air
to
the floor
outlets, windshield and side window outlets.
The recirculation button cannot be selected while in
defog mode.
9
(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air
to
the
windshield and the side window outlets, with only a
little air directed
to
the floor outlets. The air conditioning
compressor may run
to
dehumidify the air
to
prevent
window fogging. The recirculation button cannot
be selected while in defrost mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-20
Rear
Window
Defogger
The lines you see
nn
+hn
ear window warrr ++e glass.
Press this button
to
turn the rear window defogger on or
off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let
you know that the rear window defogger is active.
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
approximately ten minutes after the button is pressed.
If
your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
Notice:
Don’t use anything sharp on the inside
of
the rear window.
If
you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel
to
direct the airflow.
Ventilation
System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use the vent setting
to
direct outside
air through your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside
air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving.
With the side windows closed, air will flow into the
front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle and out the
air exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater
or the air conditioning is running, unless you have
selected recirculation mode.
3-2
1
Operation
Tips
e
e
e
e
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air
to
circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Adding outside equipment
to
the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment
to
the outside of your vehicle.
Dual
Automatic Climate Control
System
Your vehicle may have the optional dual automatic
climate control system. With this system you can control
the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
When your vehicle is first started, the display will show
the driver’s temperature setting and air delivery
mode for five seconds. Then it will show the outside
temperature.
0
(Off): Press this button
to
turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed
to
the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob
to
turn the system on.
3-22
**
4tJ
(Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and the word ”DRIVER” will light up.
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
temperature setting simultaneously
if
the two zones art!
linked. The words “DRIVER and PASS” will then
light up.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or
lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing and the word “PASS”
will light up. The passenger’s temperature setting can be
set to match and link to the driver’s temperature
setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for
three seconds. By adjusting the driver’s side
temperature setting, the passenger’s side temperature
setting will follow and both “DRIVER and PASS”
will be displayed. The passenger’s side temperature
setting also resets and relinks to the driver’s side
temperature setting
if
the vehicle has been
off
for more
than two hours.
Automatic
Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below
to
place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1.
2.
Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO
is
selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet will
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle.
Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (lSOC), the system
will
remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32”C),
the system
will
remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
3-23
Manual
Operation
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
v
(Fan): This button allows you
to
manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow
to
increase fan
speed and the down arrow
to
decrease fan speed.
The display will change
to
show you the selected fan
speed and the driver’s side temperature setting for five
seconds.
V
(Mode): Press this button
to
manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change
to
show you the selected
air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
for five seconds.
f;’
(Vent): This mode directs air
to
the instrument
panel outlets.
+2
(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air
to
the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets.
A
little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed
to
the upper outlets and
warmer air
to
the floor outlets.
+A
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air
to
the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
we.
and side window outlets. The recirculation button cannot
be selected in floor mode.
&
(Recirculation): Press this button
to
turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will also come
on
to
let you know that it is activated. Recirculation
mode is used
to
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.
Use this mode
to
help prevent outside odors and/or
dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air
inside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation
mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows
to
fog while using recirculation mode.
If
the windows do start
to
fog, select defog or
defrost mode.
a
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button
to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or
off.
When the system is
on,
the system will automatically
begin
to
cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle.
If you select air conditioning off while in front defrost or
defog mode, the air conditioning off symbol will flash
to
let you know this is not allowed.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
3-24
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp
on
the inside
of
the rear window.
If
you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape,
a
decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Do
not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar
to
the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel
to
direct the airflow.
Ventilation System
For
mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use the vent setting
to
direct outside
air through your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air
to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the
side windows closed, air will flow into the front air inlet
grilles, through the vehicle and out the air exhaust
valves.
Operation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow.
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way
to
the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air
to
circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment
to
the outside of your vehicle.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater
or the air conditioning compressor is running, unless you
have the recirculation button pushed in.
3-26
;;”
(Panel): When panel mode is selected in the front
controller, the rear system will distribute air from the four
headliner outlets.
+s;’
(Bi-level): When bi-level mode is selected in the
front controller, the rear system will distribute air
from the four headliner outlets and the third seat
floor outlet.
tg
(Floor): When floor mode is selected in the front
controller, the rear system will distribute air from the third
seat floor outlet.
+3
(Defog): When defog mode is selected in the front
controller, the rear system will distribute air from the
third seat floor outlet.
@
(Defrost): When defrost mode is selected in the
front controller, the rear system will distribute air
from the third seat floor outlet.
To activate the second row seat controls in the following
systems, set the fan knob, located on the front
console,
to
R.
3
TrailBlazer
EXT
Turn the knobs on the control panel
to
choose a fan
speed, temperature and direction of airflow.
Selecting panel mode will deliver air to the four headliner
outlets. Selecting bi-level mode will deliver warmer air
to
the third seat floor outlet and cooler air
to
the
headliner outlets. Selecting floor mode will deliver air to
the floor outlet located in the third seat area.
3-29
I
TrailBlazer EXT
Press the buttons at the bottom of the audio control
panel
to
adjust the fan speed, mode and temperature for
the rear passengers. The selections will be shown on
the display.
Press the rear fan control button with the arrow pointing
right to turn the rear climate control on. Toggle this
button
to
adjust the air flow speed.
To
turn the
rear system
off,
toggle the left arrow until the display
turns off.
3-30
Steering Wheel Climate Controls
You can adjust the fan speed and temperature of the
front climate control system by using the buttons located
on your steering wheel.
@
(Fan):
Press the up or down arrow on this switch
to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Climate Controls Personalization
If
your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you can store and recall the climate
control settings for temperature, air delivery mode and
fan speed for two different drivers. The personal
choice settings recalled are determined by the
transmitter used to enter the vehicle. After the button
with the unlock symbol
on
a remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, the climate control will adjust
to
the last settings of the identified driver. The settings
can also be changed by pressing one of the memory
buttons
(1
or 2) located on the driver’s door. When
adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for the driver.
&
(Temperature):
Press the up or down arrow
on
this
switch
to
increase or decrease the temperature of
the air flowing through the system.
3-31
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough
to
cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As
you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just
to
let you know they’re working.
If
you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together
to
let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice.
Waiting
to
do repairs can be costly-and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and
gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page
3-46.
3-32
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster
is
designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is
running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other thing you’ll need to-know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-33
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.
You may wonder what happens
if
your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. The new one will be set to the
correct millage total
of
the old odometer.
Trip
Odometer
I
.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
The trip odometer
is
part of the Driver Information
Center
(DIC).
For vehicles without a
DIC,
press the stem
located on the instrument panel cluster to display the
trip odometer. Press and hold the stem to reset the trip
odometer once it is displayed.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice:
Do
not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, or engine
damage may occur.
3-34
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to
RUN,
a chime will come on
for several seconds
to
remind people to fasten their
safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you
if
there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see
Air
Bag Systems
on
page
1-49.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go
out.
This means the system
is ready.
If
the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right
c
iy.
-
.re air --lg readines-
-
It
stays on afl you
start your vehicle,
it
means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate
in
a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash.
To
help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away
if
the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
3-35
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn't come on then, have it fixed
so
it will
be ready to warn you
if
there is a problem.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check
to
show you it is working.
It
should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system.
It
could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If
you must drive a short distance with the light
on,
be
certain
to
turn
off
all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in RUN), this gage
shows your battery's state
of charge in
DC
volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able
to
provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system
to
create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
3-36
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on
if
your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released,
it
means you have a brake problem.
A
chime
may also sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key
to
RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed
so
it
will be ready
to
warn you
if
there’s a
problem.
If
the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder
to
push. Or, the pedal may go closer
to
the
floor. It may take longer
to
stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See
Towing
Your
Vehicle
on
page
4-42.
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well. Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is
If
the warning light comes on, there could be a brake on. Driving with the brake system warning light
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. on can lead to an accident.
If
the light
is
still
on after you’ve pulled
off
the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
United States Canada
3-37
Anti-Lock Brake System Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
A
chime may also
sound when the light
comes on.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page
3-37
earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key
to
RUN.
If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
ready
to
warn you
if
there is a problem.
United States Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, it means that
your engine coolant has overheated.
If
you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn
off
the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page
5-25
for more
information.
3-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light in
Canada
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
United States Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called
OBD
II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK
ENGINE light comes on
to
indicate that there is a
problem and service
is
required. Malfunctions often will
be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to
your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light
on,
after
a
while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuei system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass
a
required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine
is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
0
Light Flashing
-
A
misfire condition has been
detected.
A
misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
3-39
Light
On Steady
-
An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
If
the Light
Is
Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as
it
is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If
the Light
Is
On Steady” following.
If
the light continues
to
flash, when it is safe
to
do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10
seconds and restart
the engine.
If
the light remains on steady, see
“If
the Light
Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to
your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If
the Light
Is
On
Steady
You
may be able
to
correct the emission
malfunction by considering the following: system
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure
to
fully install
the cap. See Filling
Your
Tank
on
page
5-7.
The
diagnostic system can determine
if
the fuel cap has
been left
off
or improperly installed.
A
loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel
to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light
off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If
so,
your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If
so,
be sure
to
fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane
on
page
5-5.
Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not
to
run as efficiently as designed.
You
may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light
to
turn on.
3-40
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use.
It
will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel
to
turn the light
off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic
tools
to
fix
any mechanical
or
electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure
to
pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need
to
know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection
if
the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection
if
the
OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if
you have recently replaced your battery or
if
your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed
to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving.
If
you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center
to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil
Pressure Gage
United States Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
3-41
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is
low.
If
you do, your engine can become
so
hot that it
catches fire.
You
or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A
reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
Change Engine
Oil
Light
CHANGE
ENG
OIL
United States Canada
This light is displayed when the engine
oil
needs to be
changed.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the
CHANGE
ENG
OIL
light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light will
be displayed when the engine
is
on.
Security Light
SECURITY
United States Canada
3-42
Service Four-wheel Drive Check Gages Warning Light
Warning Light
CHECK
SERVICE
United States Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition, as a check
to
show you it is working.
The
SERVICE
4WD light comes on
to
indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage
to
the vehicle. This system is
also designed
to
assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
GAGES
United States Canada
The
CHECK
GAGES light will come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
If
the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages
to
see
if
they are in the warning zones.
sate Ajar Light
GATE
AJAR
United States Canada
3-44
Driver Information Center
(DIC)
Your vehicle may have this feature. The DIC display
is located on the instrument panel cluster above
the steering wheel. The DIC can display information
such as the trip odometer, fuel economy and
personalization features. The DIC buttons are located
on the steering wheel.
A.
Trip Information: This button will display the
6.
Fuel Information: This button will display the
odometer, trip odometer and the timer.
current range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
options available on your vehicle.
C. Personalization: This button will change personal
D. Select: This button resets certain functions and
turns
off
or acknowledges messages on the DIC.
DIC
Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was
last
displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on
the display. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge any current warning or service messages.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons
are trip information, fuel information, personalization
and select. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
Trip Information
Use the trip information button
to
scroll through the
odometer, TRIP
A,
TRIP
B
and TIMER.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the display. This shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument
cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
3-46
Trip
A
and Trip
B
Press the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP
B
is displayed. This shows the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles
or kilometers. Both odometers can be used at the
same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing select while the desired trip odometer is
displayed. You can also reset the trip odometers with
the reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold the
reset stem for four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle.
Timer
The
DIC
can be used as a stopwatch. Press the select
button while TIMER is displayed
to
start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset (not including time
the ignition is
off).
Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even
if
another display is being
shown on the
DIC.
The timer will record up
to
99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To
stop
the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer
to
zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel
Information
Use the fuel information button
to
scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life SystemTM.
Fuel Range
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show
LOW
if
the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used
to
determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until AVG appears in
the display. Average fuel economy is how many
miles per gallon your vehicle
is
getting based on current
and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button while AVG. ECON is
displayed
to
reset the average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy will then be calculated starting from
that point.
If
the average fuel economy is not reset,
it
will be continually updated each time you drive.
3-47
Instant Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until INST appears in
the display. Instant fuel economy is how many miles
per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment
in time. The instant fuel economy cannot be reset.
GM
Oil
Life
System
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life SystemTM
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.
It will show
100%
when the system is reset after an oil
change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select
button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much
oil
you have in your engine. So, be
sure
to
check your oil level often. See
Engine
Oil
on
page
5-
15.
Personalization
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button
to scroll through the following personalization features.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
ALARM WARNING TYPE
AUTOMATIC LOCKING
AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
SEAT POSITION RECALL
PERIMETER LIGHTING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
MIRROR CURB
VIEW
ASSIST
EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT
DISPLAY UNITS (E/M)
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
The driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by pressing the appropriate memory button
1
or
2
located on the driver’s door.
3-48
Alarm
Warning
Type
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning type, press the
select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
0
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default)
ALARM WARNING:
OFF
ALARM WARNING: HORN
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS
If you choose BOTH, the headlamps will flash and the
horn will chirp when the alarm is active.
If
you choose OFF, there will be no alarm warning on
activation.
If you choose HORN, the horn will chirp when the alarm
is active.
If you choose LAMPS, the headlamps will flash when
the alarm is active.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while
it
is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on alarm warning type, see Content
Theft- Deterrent on page
2-
I
7.
Automatic
Locking
Press the select button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING
is
displayed on the DIC
to
scroll through the following
choices:
LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default)
LOCK DOORS MANUALLY
LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED
If you choose for the doors to lock out of park, the
doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
If you choose for the doors to lock manually, the doors
will not be locked automatically.
If you choose for the doors
to
lock with speed, the
doors will lock when the vehicle speed is above
8
mph
(1
3
km/h) for three seconds.
Press the personalization button while your choice is
displayed on the DIC
to
select
it
and move on
to
the next
feature. For more information on automatic door locks
see Programmable Automatic Door Locks
on
page
2-10.
3-49
Automatic Unlocking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select
your personalization for automatic unlocking, press the
select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default)
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK
If
you choose for all the doors
to
unlock in park, all of
the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted
into PARK (P).
If
you choose for all the doors
to
unlock
at
key out, all
of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
If you choose for the doors
to
unlock manually, the
doors will not be unlocked automatically.
If you choose for the driver’s door to unlock in park, the
driver’s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on
to
the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic
Door Locks
on
page
2-
IO.
3-50
Seat Position Recall
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
@
SEAT POSITION RECALL
OFF
(default)
SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN
SEAT POSITION RECALL
ON
REMOTE
If
you choose seat recall
off,
the memory seat position
you saved will only be recalled when the memory
button lor
2
is pressed.
If you choose seat recall at key in, the memory seat
position you saved will be recalled when you put the key
in the ignition.
If
you choose seat recall on remote, the memory seat
position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the
vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed
on
the DIC to
select it and move on
to
the next feature.
Perimeter Lighting
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTING
ON
(default)
0
PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF
If you choose for perimeter lighting
to
be on, the
headlamps and back-up lamps will come on for
40
seconds,
if
it is dark enough outside, when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while
it
is displayed on the DIC to
select
it
and move on
to
the next feature.
Remote Lock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
0
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default)
0
LOCK FEEDBACK:
OFF
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS
If you choose both, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the lock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will
chirp the second time you press the lock button.
If you choose off, there will be no feedback when locking
the vehicle.
If you choose horn, the horn will chirp the second time
you press the button with the lock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If
you choose lamps, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the lock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while
it
is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on
to
the next feature.
3-51
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select
your personalization for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default)
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
If you choose lamps, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If
you choose both, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn will chirp
the second time you press the unlock button.
If
you choose off, there will be no feedback when
unlocking the vehicle.
If you choose horn, the horn will chirp the second time
you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-52
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on
to
the next feature.
Headlamps
on
at Exit
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON
AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn
off
the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following chokes:
HEADLAMP DELAY:
10
SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY:
20
SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY:
60
SEC
default)
HEADLAMP DELAY:
120
SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY:
180
SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle.
If
you choose
off,
the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn
off
the vehicle.
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Mirror Curbview
Assist
Press the personalization button until MIRROR
CURBVIEW ASSIST appears in the display. To select
your personalization for tilt mirror in reverse, press
the select button while MIRROR CURBVIEW ASSIST is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
0
CURB VIEW:
OFF
(default)
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER
CURB VIEW: DRIVER
0
CURB
VIEW: BOTH
If you choose
off,
neither outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
If you choose passenger, the passenger’s outside mirror
will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE
(R).
If you choose driver, the driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
If
you choose both, the driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on
to
the next feature.
Easy
Exit
Driver Seat
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT
DRIVER SEAT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position exit, press the
select button while EASY
EXIT
DRIVER SEAT is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default)
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON
If you choose for the easy exit seat feature
to
be on, the
driver’s seat will move to the exit position when the
key is removed from the ignition. If you choose for this
feature to be off, no seat exit recall will occur.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
0
UNITS: ENGLISH
a
UNITS: METRIC KM/L
0
UNITS: METRIC L/IOOKM
3-53
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon is displayed.
If you choose metric KM/L, all information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance in
kilometers and fuel economy in KM/L is displayed.
If
you choose metric UIOOKM, all information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance in
kilometers and fuel economy in U100KM is displayed.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
Display
Language
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the available languages:
Choosing a language will display all of the information
on the DIC in the desired language.
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t want
or understand, press and hold the personalization button
and the trip information button at the same time. The DIC
will begin scrolling through the languages in their
particular language. English will be in English, French will
be
in
French and
so
on. When you see the language that
you would like, release both buttons. The DIC will then
display the information in the language you chose.
Choose one of the options and press the personalization
button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn
off
or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example,
this button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through the
languages you can select the DIC
to
display
information in.
DIC
Warnings and Messages
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver
to
correct the condition. More than one message may
appear at one time. They will appear one behind
the other. Some messages may not require immediate
action but you should press the select button
to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared
from the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
3-54
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/IDLE ENGINE
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this
message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in
PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a safe
temperature. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
If
low
oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DlC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and
do
not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
oil
as soon as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing the
select button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the air bag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Pressing
the select button will acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for
3/4
of a mile
(1.2
km), this
message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Move the turn signaVmultifunction lever to
the
off
position. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
3-55
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
liftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If
the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing the select button will acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
If
the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage
to
the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle
to
allow
the transmission
to
cool. This message will clear when
the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
3-56
ICE POSSIBLE
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises
to
a safe level,
the message will clear. Pressing the select button will
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see
if
the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear
it
from the DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to
see
if
the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR RFA # BATTERY
LOW
If
the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a message will appear
on
the DIC. The battery needs
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door
to be replaced in the transmitter. Pressing the select
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to
see
if
button will acknowledge this message and clear it from
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the the DIC display.
select button will acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Stop and turn
off
the vehicle, check the
door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to see
if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display.
3-57
Radio
with
CD
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or
HIGH.
AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive.
NONE
will appear on the display
if
the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select
OFF.
DlSP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
To
change the default on the display, push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob for
two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
AM
FM:
Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4
SEEK
b
:
Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-59
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO:
To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
Using
RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS).
RDS
features are available for use only
on
FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, your radio can
do
the following:
0
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
0
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
0
display messages from radio stations, and
0
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display,
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
DlSP
(Display): Press this knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY and the name of the program
(if
available).
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
3-6
1
Finding a
PTY
Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press the
will appear on the display.
LIST knob.
SEEK TYPE button
to
take you
to
the category’s
first station.
category and the category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice to
display the category and then
to
go
to
another
station.
4.
If you want
to
go
to
another station within that
If
the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return
to
the last station you were listening
to.
AM
FM
(Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio
to
switch
to
a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two
seconds
to
turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch
to
stronger
stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds
to
turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch
to
other stations. When
you
turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate
frequency feature will automatically be turned on.
RDS
Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display.
You
will
hear the announcement, even
if
the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing.
If
the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able
to
turn
off
alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all
RDS
stations.
INFO
(Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button
to
see the message. The
message may display the artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message
is
not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station
is
tuned
to.
When a message is not available from an station,
NO
INFO will be displayed.
3-62
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button
to
receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek
to
a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even
if
the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
display while the announcement plays.
If
the compact
disc player was being used, play will stop during
the announcement.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play
of
a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. TRAF will appear on
the display. When a traffic announcement comes on the
station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD.
If
no station is found, NO TRAF will appear
on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message
is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol.
If
you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
TUNE or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1
PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track
if
the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds.
If
pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display. If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
3-63
2
NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
3
REV
(Reverse):
Press and hold this pushbutton
to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds
to
reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds
to
reverse at
17
times the
normal playing speed. Release it
to
play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
4
FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds
to
advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds
to
advance at
17
times the
normal playing speed. Release it
to
play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6
RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton
to
hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts
to
play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM
OFF
will appear on the display.
4
SEEK
b
:
Press the left arrow
to
go
to
the start of
the current or
to
the previous track. Press the right
arrow
to
go
to
the start
of
the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
DISP (Display): Press this knob
to
see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and selected display
will
now be the default.
AM FM: Press this button
to
listen
to
the radio when a
CD is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the
player.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening
to
the radio.
EJT
(Eject):
Press this button
to
eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off
if
this
button is pressed first.
3-64
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
e
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
0
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns
to
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid.
If
so,
wait about an hour and
normal, the disc should play.
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try
a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio
with
Cassette and
CD
Standard Radio Shown
-
Base@
Similar
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and
off.
VOL
(Volume): Turn this knob
to
increase or
to
decrease volume.
AUTO
VOL
(Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select
LOW,
MEDIUM or
HIGH.
AVOL
will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
3-65
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive.
NONE
will appear on the display
if
the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed.
If
you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, your audio system
monitors the noise inside your vehicle. To use automatic
volume, press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL
ON
appears on the display. Then, automatic volume
will automatically adjust the volume of your radio
so
that
it always sounds the same to you.
To
turn the
automatic volume
off,
press the
AUTO
VOL button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
DlSP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned
off.
To change the default on the display, push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob for
two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
AM
FM:
Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4
SEEK
b
:
Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4
PSCAN (Preset Scan)
b
:
Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan to the first preset
station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. SCAN will be
displayed. Press one of the arrows again or one
of
the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to presets that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to
18
stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the radio on.
Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.
Tune in the desired station.
Press
AUTO
TONE
to
choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to.
3-66
5.
6.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to
increase or
to
decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want
to
decrease the treble.
To
adjust
push and
one beep
position.
the bass and treble
to
hold the AUDIO knob.
and adjust the display
the middle position,
The radio will produce
level
to
the middle
To adjust all tone and speaker controls
to
the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control
is
displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button
to
choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical
stations.
To
return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob.
If your vehicle has the
Base@
radio, your audio system
allows you
to
choose from four different equalization
settings: talk, driver, normal and spatial. These settings
can be used while listening
to
the radio or the CD
player. Press the AUTO TONE button
to
select
your choice.
TALK: This setting makes spoken words sound very
clear. When listening
to
non-musical material such as
news, talk shows, sports broadcasts and books on tape.
DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best
sound quality.
NORMAL: This setting enhances the stereo effects.
SPATIAL: This setting makes the listening space
seem larger.
The radio will save separate AUTO TONE settings for
each preset and source.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance
to
the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
3-67
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
Using
RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on
FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, the radio can do the following:
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
receive announcements concerning local and
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
programming,
national emergencies,
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display,
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
DlSP
(Display):
Press this knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY and the name of the program
(if
available).
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Finding a
PTY
Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
LIST knob.
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
3-68
3.
4.
Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button
to
take you
to
the category’s
first station.
If you want
to
go
to
another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice
to
display the category and then
to
go
to
another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio
to
switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two
seconds
to
turn alternate frequency on. AF
ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch
to
stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency
off.
AF OFF will
appear on the display. The radio will not switch
to
other
stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
RDS
Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display.
You will hear the announcement, even
if
the volume is
muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing.
If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing,
play will stop during the announcement. You will not be
able
to
turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO
(Information):
If
the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If
the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group
of
words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned
to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO
INFO
will be displayed.
3-69
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to
a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even
if
the volume is muted or a cassette or CD is
playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
display while the announcement plays. If the cassette,
or CD player was being used, play will stop during
the announcement.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a cassette, or CD. Press the TRAF button.
The radio will seek to a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements. When the radio finds a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop.
TRAF will appear on the display. When a traffic
announcement comes on the station that was found,
you will hear it. When the traffic announcement is over,
the radio will resume play of the cassette, or CD.
If
no station is found,
NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL
ERR
(Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED:
This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right.
If
the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing.
A
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape
is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove
the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the
VOL,
AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press EJT or DISP.
If
an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-70
1
PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to
work. Press this pushbutton to go
to
the previous
selection on the tape
if
the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from
3
to
13
seconds,
it will go
to
the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape.
If
pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than
13
seconds, it
will go to the beginning
of
the current selection.
SEEK
and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number
of
selections
to
be searched back, up
to
-9.
2
NEXT:
Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton
to
go to the next selection on the
tape.
If
you press the pushbutton more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the
display.
3
REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton
to
reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again
to
return
to
playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation
by using the TUNE and SEEK.
4
FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton
to
advance
quickly
to
another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return
to
playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear
on
the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
5
SIDE:
Press this pushbutton
to
play the other side ot
the tape.
4
SEEK
b
:
The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button
to
listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the
player.
TAPE CD: Press this button
to
play a tape when
listening
to
the radio. Press this button
to
switch
between the tape and compact disc
if
both are loaded.
The inactive tape or
CD
will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
EJT (Eject): Press this button
to
stop a tape when
it
is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the radio
off.
Cassette tapes may
be loaded with the radio off
if
this button is pressed first.
3-71
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try
to
turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat.
If
the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape
to
make sure your player
is working properly.
The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
The tape
is
wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN:
If
this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs
to
be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible
to
prevent damage
to
the tapes and player. See Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
on
page
3-96.
If
any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing
a
Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want
to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
DlSP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages’’ later in this section.
1
PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton
to
go
to
the
previous track
if
the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display.
If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
2
NEXT:
Press this pushbutton
to
go
to
the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the display.
If
you hold this pushbutton or press
it
more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
3
REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to
reverse quickly within
a
track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds
to
reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds
to
reverse at
17
times the
normal playing speed. Release it
to
play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
3-72
4
FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds
to
advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds
to
advance at
17
times the
normal playing speed. Release it
to
play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6
RDM
(Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
ON
will appear on the display. RDM
T
and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts
to
play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
4
SEEK
b
:
Press the left arrow
to
go to the start
of the current or
to
the previous track. Press the right
arrow
to
go
to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more then once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob
to
see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and selected display will now be the default.
AM
FM: Press this button to listen
to
the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the
player.
TAPE
CD:
Press this button
to
play a tape when
listening
to
the radio. Press this button
to
switch
between the tape and compact disc
if
both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
EJT
(Eject): Press this button
to
stop a
CD
when
it is playing or
to
eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off
if
this button is pressed first.
Compact
Disc
Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
It’s
very hot. When the temperature returns
to
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0
The air is very humid.
If
so, wait about an hour and
becomes smoother the disc should play.
normal, the disc should play.
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-73
Radio
with
Six-Disc
CD
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to
you as you drive. If you don’t want
to
use automatic
volume, select
OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob
to
switch the display
between the time and the radio station frequency. Push
this knob with the ignition
off
to display the time.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob
to
turn the system
on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob
to
increase or
to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically
to
make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Finding
a
Station
AM
FM:
Press this button
to
switch between AM, FM1
and
FM2.
The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
k
SEEK
>I
:
Press the right or the left arrow
to
go to
the next or
to
the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only
to
those with a strong signal.
3-74
k
SCAN
>I
:
Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to
18
stations (six AM,
six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1.
Turn the radio on.
2.
Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3.
Tune in the desired station.
4.
Press AUTO
EQ
to select the equalization that best
suits the type of station selected.
5.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease.
If
a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To
adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose between bass, midrange and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock and classical program types.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO
EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.
3-75
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO:
To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob
to
move the
sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade
to
the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will
adjust the display level
to
the middle position.
To
adjust all tone and speaker controls
to
the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will
produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the
display.
Using
RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on
FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, the radio can do the following:
Seek
to
stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features
to
work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned
to
an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1.
Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3.
Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK
arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
3-76
4.
If
you want
to
go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either
SEEK
arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice
to
display
the category and then
to
go
to
another station.
5.
If
PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go
back
to
Step 1.
If
both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want
to
interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts
if
desired. When you are
listening
to
a compact disc, the last selected
RDS
station will interrupt play
if
that selected program type
format is broadcast.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the
last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.
AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio
to
switch
to
a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two
seconds
to
turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two
seconds
to
turn alternate frequency off.
AF
OFF will
appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other
stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
Setting Preset
PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return
to
your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up
to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1
or
FM2.
2.
Press the P-TYPE button
to
activate program type
select mode.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob
to
select a PTY.
4.
Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-77
RDS
Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even
if
the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able
to
turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button
to
see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If
the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed,
INFO
will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned
to.
TRAF
(Traffic):
TRAF will appear on the display
if
the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station.
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear
it.
If the current tuned station does
not
broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
seek
to
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will
appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will
resume play of the CD. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-78
Playing a Compact
Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD
CD
4
:
Press the LOAD side of this button
to
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact
disc player will hold up
to
six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1.
Turn the ignition on.
2.
Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3.
Wait for the light, located
to
the right of the
slot,
to
turn green.
4.
Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the
slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
disc,
it
will be activated each time you play a disc.
If
the radio is on or off, the disc will begin
to
play
automatically.
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1.
Turn the ignition on.
2.
Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located
to
the
right of the
slot,
will begin
to
flash.
3.
Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the
slot,
label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green you can load another disc. The disc player
takes up
to
six discs. Do not try
to
load more
than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
Steps
1
through
3.
When you have finished loading
discs, with the radio on or
off,
press the LOAD side of
the LOAD CD button
to
cancel the loading function. The
radio will begin
to
play the last CD loaded.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin
to
play automatically.
As each new track starts
to
play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact
Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button
to
start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
3-79
pushbutton that corresponds
to
the CD you want
to
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If
an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages’’ later in this section.
LOAD CD
A
(Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press
and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear
a beep and the light will flash
to
let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try
to
eject the disc
several times before stopping.
Do
not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
LOAD CD eject button
to
eject a disc after you have
tried
to
push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which
will cause the receiver
to
not eject the disc until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc
is
ejected, remove
the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR
knob off and then on again. This will clear the
disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into
the player again.
<<
REV
(Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it
to
play the passage.
The display
will
show elapsed time.
FWD
>>
(Forward): Press and hold this button
to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
RPT
(Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening
to,
press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again
to
turn it
off.
To repeat the disc you are listening
to,
press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again
to
turn
it
off.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen
to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of
the following:
3-80
0
0
To
play the tracks on the disc you are listening
to
in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM
ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to
turn it
off.
To play the tracks on all of the discs that are
loaded in random order, press and release the RDM
button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display.
Press RDM again
to
turn it off.
AUTO
EQ
(Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to
select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a compact disc. For more
information on AUTO
EQ,
see “AUTO EQ” listed
previously in this section.
k
SEEK
>I
:
Press the left arrow
to
go
to
the start of
the current track,
if
more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow
to
go
to
the next track. If you
press the button more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the disc.
k
SCAN
>I
:
To scan one disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen
to
10
seconds of each track of the
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press either SCAN arrow again,
to
stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature
to
listen to
10
seconds of the first tracks of each
disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to
stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track and elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
AM
FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a
disc(s) is in the player.
Using Song List
Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving
20
track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1.
Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one
disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2.
Check
to
see that the disc changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the
SONG
LIST
button to turn it off.
3-8
1
3.
4.
5.
Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button
to
locate the track that you want
to
save. The track will begin
to
play.
Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds
to
save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing
SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound
to
confirm that the track has been saved.
Repeat Steps
3
and
4
for saving other selections.
If
you attempt
to
save more than
20
selections,
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
1.
Turn the disc player on.
2.
Press the SONG LIST button
to
turn song list on.
3.
Press the
SEEK
SCAN arrows
to
select the desired
S-LIST will appear on the display.
track
to
be deleted.
4.
Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard
to
confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added
to
the
song list, the track will be added
to
the end of the
list.
To
delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1.
Turn the disc player on.
2.
Press the SONG LIST button
to
turn song list
on.
3.
Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
S-LIST will appear on the display.
than four seconds.
A
beep will be heard, followed
by
two
beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If
a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved
to
the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To
end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-82
Compact
Disc
Messages
CHECK
CD:
If
this message appears on the radio
display,
it
could be due to one of the following reasons:
@
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
@
The air is very humid.
If
so,
wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good
CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if
an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile Disc
(DVD) entertainment system. The entertainment
system includes
a
DVD player, a video display screen,
two sets of IR (Infrared) wireless headphones, a
remote control and an instructional video disc.
Before
You
Drive
The video entertainment system is for passengers in the
second and third row seats only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while driving and should
not try to do so.
In severe or extreme temperature conditions your
entertainment system should not be operated until the
temperature is within the operating range. This will keep
your video components from being damaged when
the temperature
is
below -4°F (-20°C) or above
140°F (60°C). To resume operation, shut
off
the
entertainment system, pull down the video screen and
then heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature
is within the operating range.
Headphones
The entertainment system includes two
IR
wireless
headphones.
Mini-headphone jacks are also provided for use with
customer provided headphones.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch and
a volume control. To use the headphones turn the
switch to ON. An indicator light will illuminate. If the light
does not illuminate, the batteries may need to be
replaced. See Battery Replacement later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to OFF
when
not in use.
If the system is shut
off,
or
if
the headphones are out of
range of the
IR
transmitters below the overhead
RSE
control panel for more than three minutes, the
headphones will shut
off
automatically to save the
batteries. If you move too far forward or step out of the
vehicle, the headphones will cut out.
3-83
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control.
Notice:
Do
not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a
cool
place.
Battery Replacement
To
change the batteries, do the following:
1.
Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
2.
Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
3.
Tighten the screws
to
close the compartment door.
located on the left side of the headphones.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
If the headphones are
to
be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo
RCA
Jacks
The RCA jacks and the mini-headphone jacks are
located behind the video screen on the overhead
console. The RCA jacks allow you
to
hook up an
auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game
unit. The yellow RCA jack is used for video and the
red and white RCA jacks are used for audio. You may
require adapter connectors or cables
to
connect
your auxiliary device
to
the RCA jacks. Refer
to
the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage. The
mini-headphone jacks allow you
to
hook up two
customer provided wired headphones.
To
use the auxiliary audio and video inputs on the RSE.
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder
to
the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the front of the
RSE player. If a disc is not present in the player, the
auxiliary signal will immediately be displayed on
the RSE. If a disc is present when the RSE power is
turned on, the player will automatically begin playing the
disc and the user will need
to
press the AUX button
on the remote control
to
display and/or hear the auxiliary
input signals. Each press of the AUX button on the
remote control will switch the system between disc and
auxiliary input. The wired headphone volume control
will only operate when the DVD player power is turned
on and it controls both wired headphone jacks at
the same time. See
Remote
Control
later in this section
for more information.
Audio Speakers
Audio from the DVD player can only be heard either
through the
IR
headphones or wired headphones
(not included). The sound will not come through the
vehicle’s speakers.
3-84
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To
use the video screen, do the following:
1.
Push forward on the release button and the screen
2. Push the screen away from you and adjust its
will fold down.
position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use,
push
it up into its
locked position.
The DVD player and display will continue
to
operate
when the display is in either the up or the down position.
Notice:
Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” in the Index for more information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See Remote
Control
later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player works while the ignition is in RUN or
ACCESSORY.
The entertainment system is only compatible with
Region
1
DVDs authorized for use in the United States,
Canada, Puerto Rico, Bermuda, the Virgin Islands
and some islands in the Pacific. On some DVD jackets,
you will see the region displayed. Regular audio CDs
3-85
can also be played by the DVD player. The video
screen will default to off when an audio CD is played.
Home recorded CDs (CDRs) may not play in this
DVD player. Try the audio system’s CD player instead.
If an error message appears on the front instrument
panel display, see
DVD
Messages later in this section.
DVD
Player Buttons
&I
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on.
-o+
(Wired Headphone Volume): Press the plus
(+)
or
minus
(-
)
symbol to increase or to decrease the
wired headphone volume.
,111
(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play. Press
this button while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press
it again to continue playing the DVD.
(Stop/Eject): Press this button
to
stop playing,
rewinding or fast forwarding. Press the button a second
time to eject the disc.
Playing a
Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start.
If
a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the player or on the remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip
the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing
after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not
begin playing, refer to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resume Playback
To stop a disc, press and release the stop/eject button
on the DVD player or the stop button on the remote.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on the
DVD player or the remote.
As
long as the disc has
not been ejected and the stop button has not been
pressed twice on the remote control, the movie should
resume play from where it was last stopped. If the
disc has been ejected or
if
the stop button on the remote
has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play at
the beginning.
Parental Control Button: This button
is
located on the
front of the DVD console which is mounted vertically
above the driver’s right shoulder. Press this button while
a DVD is playing to freeze the video and mute the
audio to the headphones. It will also disable all other
button operations from the remote and DVD player.
The driver will then be able to gain the attention of the
rear seat passengers. Press this button again to
restore normal play of the DVD.
3-86
Ejecting a Disc
Press the stop/eject button on the DVD player once to
stop and a second time to eject the disc.
If a disc
is
ejected from the player, but not removed, the
DVD player will reload the disc after approximately
10
to
20
seconds.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed:
Remote
Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the small square
window to the left of the disc slot and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect
the ability of the entertainment system to receive signals
from the remote control. Be sure the remote’s batteries
are not discharged, as this will also affect the function
of the remote control. Objects blocking the line of sight
may also affect the function of the remote control.
e
e
e
e
e
-
Nofice:
Do not store the remote control in heat or
control and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the remote control stored in a cool,
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed direct
sunlight.
This
could
damage
the
remote
if
a disc is inserted upside down,
if
the disc is not
able to be read or
if
the disc format is not
compatible. dry place.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed
if
the mechanism can not play the disc. Severely
scratched discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed for all non Region
1
discs (DVDs sold
outside of North America).
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed
if
the disc is not properly lined up in the mechanism.
Disc Not Present: This message will be displayed
if
the PLAY, EJECT or DVD
AUX
buttons are
pressed and no disc is in the player.
3-87
Remote Control Buttons
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on or off.
,111
PLAY/PAUSE: Press this button
to
play a disc.
Press this button while a disc is playing
to
pause.
Press it again
to
continue playing.
STOP: Press this button
to
stop playing, reversing
or fast forwarding the DVD.
A
EJECT/LOAD: Press this button
to
eject a DVD
while it
is
playing.
If
the disc has been ejected and not
removed from the player, pressing this button will
load the disc. The stop/eject button on the DVD player
will also load the disc
if
the disc is ejected and not
removed.
a
REW (Rewind): Press this button to reverse the
DVD
at
5x speed.
To
stop reversing, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright or the previews.
bb
FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button
to
fast
forward the DVD at 5x speed. To stop fast forwarding,
press this button again. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
PREV (Previous): Press this button
to
return to
the start of the current chapter. Press this button again
to
return
to
the previous chapter. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the
previews.
NEXT:
Press this button
to
jump
to
the beginning
of the next chapter. This button may not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
3-88
MENU: Press this button
to
view the media menu.
The media menu is different on every disc. Use the up
and down and the right and the left arrow buttons
to
move the cursor around the media menu. After making
your selection, press the ENTER button. Some discs
may contain a short skit leading up
to
the media menu.
+cI
WIRED VOLUME: Press the plus or the minus
symbol
to
increase or
to
decrease the volume of
the wired headphones. You can press repeatedly or
press and hold the plus or the minus symbol
to
increase
or
to
decrease the volume in large amounts.
a
SIZE/ANGLE: This button controls the screen
ratio of the video display. Press and release this button
to
stretch a 4:3 picture
to
fit the wide aspect ratio
16:9
screen.
Press and release this button to choose different angles
of the same scene. Press and hold this button again
to
change angles. This feature is not available on
all DVD discs.
DISP/S-TITLE (Display Subtitle) CHAP TRK (Chapter
Track): Press and release this button to display the
title, chapter and elapsed time of the current video
segment or the track and time
if
a CD is being played.
Press and hold this button to see the DVDs subtitle
language. Press and release this button again
to
change
it. This feature is not available on all DVD discs.
COMP/AUDIO (Compression) COMP: Press and
release this button to display the current compression
displayed on the screen. Press this button again
to
select the next compression state. Three compression
states are available including minimum, standard
and
off.
The compression feature only functions on AC3
(Dolby@ Digital Surround) encoded DVD video discs.
Press and hold this button
to
see
if
the DVD playing has
optional audio tracks, such as different languages or
commentaries. Press and release
to
change selections.
INPUT/TITLE DVD AUX (Auxiliary): Press and
release this button
to
switch between the auxiliary input
device and the DVD player.
Press and hold this button
to
see a display
of
the DVD’s
titles. Press and release
to
change the titles available.
6-h
RTN (Return): When a DVD menu is active
and this button is pressed, the selected option will be
disabled. This button could have different functions with
different discs.
SCREEN BRIGHTNESS: Press the plus or the
minus symbol
to
increase or
to
decrease the brightness
of the screen. This button can also be found on the
video screen.
-9-
LIGHT: Press this button
to
illuminate the keypad
for about eight seconds.
3-89
Setup Menu
To access the setup menu, ensure a DVD is in the
player and the video is in stop mode. Press the menu
key. Once the menu is activated, use the UP, DOWN,
RIGHT, LEFT, and Enter buttons
to
navigate the screen.
The setup menu allows the use
to
select default
preferences for Menu Language, Subtitle Language,
Audio Language, TV Aspect, TV Mode, and Dynamic
Range Compression.
Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the
setup menus. In the event a particular feature
is
not supported, defaults will be provided by the DVD
media.
Exit the setup menu by pressing the RETURN button on
the remote control. If you make changes
to
the system
setup defaults, the disc will resume play from the
beginning and not where it previously left off.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1.
Unclip the battery door located on the back of the
2.
Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
3.
Close the battery door securely.
remote control.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
If the remote control is
to
be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-90
Problem
No
power.
Disc will not play
No sound.
during fast forward or fast
reverse.
Recommended Action
The ignition might be
off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. (The power LED
will flash.)
The lnputrritle on the
remote might be set for
auxiliary.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The volume on the
headphones could be
too
low. Adjust it on the
wired headphones on the
front panel or the remote.
For the wireless
headphones, adjust the
dial on the right earpiece
on the headphones.
This is normal for this
operation.
Problem
The picture does not
fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched
out.
I
ejected the disc and
tried
to
take it out, but it
was pulled back into
the slot.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Recommended
Action
~~~~~~~ ~~~
Quickly press and release
the SIZE/ANGLE button
on the remote. This will
fill
the screen. If the screen
looks stretched out, press
and release the
SIZE/ANGLE button
again.
If there are borders on
the
top
and bottom, the
movie may have been
made that way for a
standard screen.
Pressing the
SIZE/ANGLE button
should
fill
the sides.
Eject the disc again.
Press and hold the
COMP/AUDIO button on
the remote. This will
access the DVD's main
menu. Then follow the
prompts.
Problem
The remote does
not work.
I
can not hear anything
when
I
lower the volume.
How do
I
get subtitles
on or off?
Recommended
Action
'oint the remote directly
2t
the player, but not the
screen.
The batteries could be
dead
or
put in wrong.
If the power button on
the player is flashing, the
parental control is on,
which disables the
remote.
Quickly press and
release the
COMP/AUDIO button on
the remote. This tells you
the current default
setting. Press and
release the
COMP/AUDIO button
again
to
choose another
setting.
Press and hold the
DISP/S-TITLE buttons on
the remote to go to the
DVDs main menu. Then
follow the prompts.
3-91
I
Problem
After stopping the player, I
push PLAY but
sometimes the DVD starts
where
I
left off and
sometimes at the
beginning.
The DVD is playing but
there is no picture or
sound.
The auxiliary medium
(video game, camcorder,
etc.) is running but there
is no picture or sound.
The audio or video skips
or jumps.
where the DVD left
off.
Press the STOP button
twice
to
start the DVD at
the beginning.
If
the power is
off
and the
DVD is still in the player,
get
to
auxiliary input.
The auxiliary medium’s
cords could be plugged
into the wrong jack.
Problem
When
I
return
to
the DVD
from the system menu,
sometimes it plays from
the beginning and
sometimes from where
it
left off.
The fast forward, fast
reverse, previous and
next functions do
not work.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The EJECT/LOAD
button does not work.
I
lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
Recommended Action
If the STOP button was
pressed once, it resumes
play from where
it
left off.
If the STOP button was
Dressed twice, it will start
at
the beginning of the
DVD.
However,
if
a change
was made
to
the menu,
the DVD will start from
the beginning, even
if
the
STOP button was only
pressed once.
Some commands that do
one thing for DVDs will
not always work or
perform the same
function for audio, CDs
or
games.
Press the EJECT/LOAD
button on the remote, or
the STOP/EJECT button
on the DVD player.
Turn the power
off,
then
on again.
Do not attempt
to
forcibly
remove the disc from the
player.
See your dealer for
assistance.
3-92
Problem
What is the best way to
clean the screen?
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes for a moment
then it comes back.
Recommended Action
Pour some isopropyl or
rubbing alcohol on a clean
cloth and wipe.
This could be caused by
interference from cell
towers or by using your
cell phone in the vehicle.
Rear
Seat
Audio
(RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the music sources: radio, cassette tapes or
CDs.
The rear seat passengers can only control the music
sources that the front seat passengers are not listening
to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to
a cassette tape or
CD
through headphones while
the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume
for each set of headphones. The front seat audio
controls always override the rear seat audio controls.
TrailBlazer Shown, TrailBlazer EXT Similar
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or
off.
The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on unless you have a
Base@
equipped vehicle. You may operate the rear
seat audio functions even when the primary radio power
is
off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase
volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume.
The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the
right
VOL
knob controls the right headphone.
3-93
PROG (Program): Press this button
to
switch between
playing a cassette tape or a CD and listening
to
the
radio. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
SEEK:
Press the SEEK button
to
seek
to
the next
station and stay there. The display will show your
selection.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEK
button. The radio will scan
to
a preset station, play for a
few seconds, then go the next preset station. The
display will show your selections. The SEEK button is
inactive
if
the front radio is in use.
While listening
to
a cassette tape, press the SEEK
button
to
hear the next selection on the tape. Press and
hold the SEEK button
to
go
to
the other side of the
tape. The SEEK button is inactive
if
the tape mode on
the front radio
is
in use.
While listening
to
a CD, press the SEEK button
to
hear
the next track on the CD. The SEEK button is inactive
if
the CD mode on the front radio or the CD changer
is in use.
Radio Personalization
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows the driver
to
return
to
the last used audio source (radio, cassette or
CD) using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This
feature can also store and recall
AM
and FM presets,
volume, tone and the last selected radio station.
The number on the back of each transmitter
(1
or 2)
corresponds
to
driver
1
or
2.
If
transmitter
1
is used
to
enter the vehicle, the last used audio source and/or
settings set by driver
1
will be recalled. If transmitter 2 is
used
to
enter the vehicle, the last used audio source
and/or settings set by driver
2
will be recalled.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK@ is designed
to
discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion
of
the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
If the
radio is moved
to
a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned
off,
the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@ is armed.
With THEFTLOCK@ activated, your radio will not
operate
if
stolen.
3-94
Audio
Steering Wheel Controls DVD Distortion
AM/FM:
Press this button
to
switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. When playing a cassette tape or compact
disc, press this button to listen
to
the radio.
oojn
(Program): Press this button
to
tune
to
the next
preset radio station. When playing a cassette tape,
press this button
to
play the other side of the tape.
When using the CD changer, this button will seek
to
the next track.
(Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to
increase or
to
decrease volume.
If your vehicle has this You may experience audio distortion in the
feature, certain radio
IR
headphones when operating cellular phones,
functions can be operated scanners,
CB
radios, Global Positioning Systems
by using the controls (GPS)", two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
on your steering wheel.
It
may be necessary
to
turn off the
DVD
player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
*
Excludes the Onstar@ System.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations
to
interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble
to
reduce this noise
if
you ever get
it.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about
10
to
40
miles
(16
to
65
km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound
to
come and go.
3-95
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored
in
their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50
hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50
hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see
if
the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
3-96
1.
Turn the ignition on.
2.
Turn the radio off.
3.
Press and hold the TAPE
CD
button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and a
cassette symbol
will
flash for five seconds.
4.
Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape
detection feature will be active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own.
A
non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care
of
Your
CDs
and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust.
If
the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center
to
the edge.
Be sure never
to
touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges
or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care
of
Your
CB
and
BVD
Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal
to
the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video Screen
?our some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press
too
hard or
too
long on the video screen.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged.
if
the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten
it
out
by hand.
If
the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Check occasionally
to
be sure the mast is still tightened
to
the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Chime Level Adjustment
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio.
To
change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton
6
with the ignition on and the
radio power
off.
The chime volume level will change
from the normal level
to
loud, and
LOUD
will be
displayed on the radio.
To
change back
to
the default or
normal setting, press and hold pushbutton
6
again.
The chime level will change from the loud level
to
normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.
3-97
.&
NOTES
3-98
Section Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the
Road.
and Your Vehicle
..........
4-2
Defensive Driving
...........................................
4.2
Drunken Driving
.............................................
4.2
Control
of
a Vehicle
........................................
4-5
Braking
.........................................................
4.5
Traction Assist System (TAS)
...........................
4.8
Locking Rear Axle
..........................................
4-9
Steering
........................................................
4.9
Off-Road Recovery
.......................................
4-11
Passing
.......................................................
4.12
Loss
of
Control
.............................................
4-13
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
....................................................
4-14
Driving at Night
..
...................................
4-26
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
..................
4-27
City Driving
..................................................
4-30
Freeway Driving
...........................................
4-31
Before Leaving
on
a Long Trip
.......................
4-32
Highway Hypnosis
........................................
4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads
................................
4-33
Winter Driving
..............................................
4-35
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
........
4-39
Towing Your Vehicle
.....................................
4-42
Recreational Vehicle Towing
...........................
4-42
Loading Your Vehicle
....................................
4-45
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment
.......
4-46
Towing a Trailer
...........................................
4-47
Towing
..........................................................
4-42
4-
1
Your
Driving,
the
Road,
and
Your
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page
1-9.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going
to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task
-
such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor
-
makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place
to
do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy.
It’s
the number one contributor
to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs
to
drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In
most
cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000
annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000
people injured,
Many adults
-
by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population
-
choose never
to
drink alcohol,
so
they
never drive after drinking. For persons under
21,
4-2
it’s against the law in every
U.S.
state
to
drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way
to
eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never
to
drink alcohol and
then drive. But what
if
people do?
How
much is
“too
much”
if
someone plans
to
drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here
is
some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time
it
has taken the drinker
to
consume the alcohol.
According
to
the American Medical Association, a
180
Ib
(82
kg) person who drinks three
12
ounce
(355
ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about
0.06
percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three
4
ounce
(120
ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks
if
each had
1
-
1/2
ounces
(45
ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if
the same person drank three double martinis
(3
ounces
or
90
ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close
to
0.12
percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference,
too.
Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
4-3
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number
of
U.S.
states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at
0.08
percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is
0.05
percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is
0.04
percent.
The BAC will be over
0.1
0
percent after three
to
six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability
to
drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10
percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05
percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05
percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05
percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06
percent has doubled his or her chance
of
having a
collision. At a BAC level of
0.10
percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision
is
12
times greater; at a
level of
0.15
percent, the chance is
25
times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.
No
amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up.
“1’11
be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What
if
there’s an emergency, a need
to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able
to
react quickly enough
to
avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries
to
the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking
-
driver or passenger
-
is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if
the person had
not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by even a small
amount
of
alcohol. You can have a serious-or
even fatal-collision
if
you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-4
Control
of
a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it
to
go. They are the brakes,
the steering and the accelerator.
A11
three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have
to
decide
to
push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have
to
bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.
So
do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at
60
mph
(100
km/h) travels
66
feet
(20
m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts
-
heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking
-
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster
if
you do a
lot
of heavy braking. If you keep pace
4-5
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a
lot
of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If
your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.
If
you
do,
the pedal may get harder
to
push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer
to
stop and
the brake pedal will be harder
to
push.
nti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake
System
Warning
Light
on
page
3-38.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning
(DRP)
system. If there’s a
DRP
problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights
will
come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer
for service.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on
the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
4-6
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one
of
the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most
of
available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer
on wheel speed and controls
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t
keeps receiving updates
braking pressure
change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front
of
you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes
if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using
Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-7
Traction Assist System (TAS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if
it
senses that one or both of the rear wheels are
spinning or beginning
to
lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power
to
limit
wheel spin.
The LOW TRAC light next
to
the button will come on
when the TAS is limiting wheel spin. You may feel
or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you
may notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal
and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
If
your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you
to
safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control Light
on
page
3-43.
When the TRAC
OFF light on the button is on, the TAS is off and will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TRAC OFF light on the button will come on under
the
e
e
e
following conditions:
The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or by turning off
the automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
The transmission is in FIRST
(1)
gear; TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TAS off
if
you ever need
to.
You should turn the TAS off
if
your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required.
4-8
To turn the system on or
off, press the TAS
OFF/ON
button located near the
shift lever.
If
you used the
button
to
turn the system
off, the TRAC
OFF
light OD
the button will come on
and stay on.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The TRAC
OFF
light on the
button should
go
off.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS
is set
to
come on automatically or not, you can always
turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off
button.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel.
It
works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction
to
move the vehicle.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature
so
that the system will not come on
automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
Steering
Power
Steering
1.
Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the
transmission in PARK (P).
2.
Turn the ignition to
RUN;
do not start the engine.
3.
Apply the brake pedal, press the accelerator
pedal
to
the floor and then press the TAS OFF/ON
button and hold it down for at least six seconds.
4.
Release the TAS button and both pedals.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
4-9
Steering Tips
Driving
on
Curves
It’s
important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A
lot
of the “driver
lost
control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in
a
curve depends on the
condition
of
your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems
-
steering
and acceleration
-
have
to
do their work where the tires
meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
See Traction Assist System (TAS)
on
page
4-8.
What should you do
if
this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it
to
go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to
go
slower.
If you need
to
reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking
-
if
you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action
-
steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking
on
page
4-5.
It
is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
4-1
0
Off-Road
Recovery
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full
180
degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to
act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason
to
practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off
the
accelerator and then,
if
there is nothing in the way,
steer
so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up
to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to
go
straight down the roadway.
4-1
1
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about
to
pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender
to
frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face
to
face with the
worst of all traffic accidents
-
the head-on collision.
So
here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and
to
crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines.
If
you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right
to
pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even
if
the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
Do not get
too
close
to
the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially
if
you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space
if
the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance
to
pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move
so
you will be
increasing speed as the time comes
to
move
into the other lane.
If
the way is clear
to
pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And
if
something happens to cause you
to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out
to
pass the slow
vehicle. Remember
to
glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving
out
of the right lane
to
pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle
to
see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
4-1
2
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem
to
be
farther away from you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver
to
get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little
to
the right.
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to
your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,
too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Assist System, remember: It
helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have
this system, or
if
the system is
off,
then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid
if
it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
4-1
3
conditions.
It
is important
to
slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best
to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting
to
a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn
to
recognize warnin?
clues
-
such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road
to
make a “mirrored surface’’
-
and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road
Driving
with
Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive.
Also,
see
Braking
on
page
4-5.
If your vehicle
doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive
off-road unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But
it
does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left- the great North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked.
Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back
to
nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide.
You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will
help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Before
You
Go
Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure
to
have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check
to
make sure all
underbody shields
(if
so
equipped) are properly
attached.
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
Is
there enough fuel?
Is
the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply
to
off-roading where you’ll be
driving?
If
you don’t know, you should check with
law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If
so,
be sure to get the
necessary permission.
4-1
4
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things
to
remember about
how
to
load your vehicle.
e
The heaviest things should
be
on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t
toss
thi
s
around.
-
-
0
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making
it
more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured
if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You’ll
find other important information in this manual.
0
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
See Loading Your -Vehicle on page
4-45,
Luggage
Carrier on page
2-48
and Tires
on
page
5-53.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader
to
follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
@
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
0
Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment
-
shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses
-
or disturb wildlife (this includes
4-1
5
When you’re d.
.,...J
01.
,
oad, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash.
So,
whether you’re
driving on or
off
the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need
to
be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to
consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous.
A
rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you
if
you’re not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things
to
consider:
@
Is
the path ahead clear?
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
Will you have
to
stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands
if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can’t control
the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important
to
avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what isn’t.
4-1
7
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this
is
certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even
a
small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious
-
or even fatal
-
accident
if
you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page
4-2.
Driving on
Off-Road
Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t
do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If
you drive up them, you will stall.
If
you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed.
If
you drive across them, you
will
roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
If
you
have any doubt about the steepness, don’t
drive the hill.
Approaching
a
Hill
When you approach
a
hill, you need
to
decide
if
it’s one
of those hills that’s just
too
steep
to
climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way
to
the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things
to
consider as you
approach a hill.
Is
there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Is
there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Is
there a straight path up or down the hill
so
you
won’t have
to
make turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
What’s beyond the hill?
Is
there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill
if
you don’t know. It’s the smart way
to
find out.
Is
the hill simply
too
rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible
to
the effects of erosion.
4-1
8
Driving
Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
0
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
steering wheel.
your speed. Don’t use more power than you
need, because you don’t want your wheels
to
start
spinning or sliding.
0
Try
to
drive straight up the hill
if
at all possible.
If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
@
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
0
Use your headlamps even during the day. They
to let opposing traffic know you’re there.
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight
up.
@
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
the hill.
Driving to the top (crest) of a
hill
at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff,
or
even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed.
As
you near the top
of
a hill,
slow
down
Q:
What should I do if
my
vehicle stalls, or
is
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
about
to
stall, and
I
can’t make
it
up the hill?
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
0
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards.
Also,
apply the
parking brake.
@
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
4-1
9
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift
to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
0
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the
12
o’clock position.
This way, you’ll be able to tell
if
your wheels
are straight and maneuver as you back down.
It’s
best that you back down the hill with your
wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel
too
far
to
the left or
right will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you
must
not
do
if
you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Never attempt
to
prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL
(N)
to
“rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could
go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake
to
stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift
to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
Never attempt to turn around
if
you are about
to
stall when going up a hill.
If
the hill is steep
enough
to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough
to
cause you
to
roll over
if
you turn around. If you can’t
make
it
up the hill, you must back straight down
the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling,
I
try to back down
the hill and decide
I
just can’t
do
it. What
should
I
do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK
(P)
and turn
off
the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take
if
it rolled downhill.
Do
not shift the transfer
case
to
NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
4-20
S1lll~lllg the transfer case to NEU’. ,AL can
cause your vehicle to roll even
if
the
transmission
is
in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured.
If
you are going to leave
your vehicle, set
the
parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK
(P).
But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the
2
Wheel High, 4 High or
4
Low position.
Driving
Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number
of
things:
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
vehicle control?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of the hill?
Is
there
a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause
loss
of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending
a
hill
and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
4-2
1
For reasons like these, you need
to
decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed.
If
you have any
doubt about the steepness
of
the incline, don’t
drive across
it.
Find another route instead.
Q:
What
if
I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but
I
hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should
I
do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting
to
slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
”walk the course”
so
you know what the surface
is
like before you drive it.
Stalling
on
an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even
if
the door there is harder
to
open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take
if
it does roll over.
4-23
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles
or exhaust pipe, don’t try it
-
you probably won’t
get through. Also, water that deep can damage your
axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur
if
you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer
to stop.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown.
If
it’s only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page
4-27
for
more information on driving through water.
After
Off-Road
Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure.
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
4-25
Driving at Night
A
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely
to
be
impaired
-
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need
to
slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
No
one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light
to
see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example,
if
you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise
to
wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting
to
night. But
if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a
lot
of
things invisible.
and rest.
4-26
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps.
It
can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes
to
readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or
a
vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean
-
inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier
to
pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so
should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness
-
the inability
to
see in dim light
-
and
aren’t even aware of
it.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet
Roads
‘/,I
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And,
if
your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction.
It’s
always wise
to
go
slower and be cautious
if
rain starts
to
fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-27
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if
your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But
if
you can’t, try
to
slow down before
you hit them.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control
of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-28
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen
if
the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can
if
your tires do not have much tread or
if
the pressure in
one or more is low.
It
can happen
if
a
lot
of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice
is
to slow down when
it
is
raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice:
If
you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake
and
badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Flowing or rushing water creates stror.,
.-.
ces.
If
you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away.
As
little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away
a
smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared
to
have your
view restricted by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires
on
page
5-53.
4-29
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want
to
watch
out
for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to
traffic signals.
Here are ways
to
increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way
to
get
to
where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a
cross-country trip.
most large cities.
You’ll
save time and energy.
See Freeway
Driving
on page
4-31.
Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A
traffic
light
is
there because the corner is busy enough
to
need it. When a light turns green, and
just
before
you start
to
move, check both ways for vehicles
that have
not
cleared the intersection
or
may
be running the red light.
Try
to
use the freeways that rim and crisscross
4-30
Freeway
Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to
the freeway.
If
you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to
check traffic. Try
to
determine where you expect
to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try
to
blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to
the
posted limit or
to
the prevailing rate
if
it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want
to
pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the shoulder
to
make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. your “blind” spot.
4-31
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want
to
leave the freeway, move
to
the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on
to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend
to
think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh
-
such as after a day’s
work
-
don’t plan
to
make
too
many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is
your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to
go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing
to
help
if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Is
the reservior full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip.
Is
the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time
to
avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-32
Highway Hypnosis
Is
there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen
to
you!
If
it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to
the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Hill
and
Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or
if
you’re
planning
to
visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
on
page
4-14
for information about driving off-road.
4-33
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
I
-
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down
a
hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on
a
steep
downhill slope.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition
off
is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool
your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
0
As
you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
4-34
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn
of
special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter
Driving
I
Here are some tips for winter driving:
*
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
*
You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and reflective warning triangles. And,
if
you will be
driving under severe conditions, include
a
small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple
of
burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-35
Driving on Snow
or
Ice
Most
of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However,
if
there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a
lot
less traction or “grip” and will need
to
be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard
to
drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it‘s
about freezing
(32°F;
OOC)
and freezing rain begins
to
fall. Try
to
avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition
-
smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow
-
drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on.
It
will
improve your ability
to
accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow.
See If
You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or
Snow
on
page
4-39.
Even though your vehicle has a traction
system, you’ll want
to
slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. See Traction Assist
System
(TAS)
on
page
4-8.
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the gentle traction.
If
you accelerate
too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
I
4-36
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want
to
begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking
on
page
4-5.
Allow greater following distance on any
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
slippery road.
you hit a spot that’s covered with ice.
On
an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear.
If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not
to
brake while you’re
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If
You’re
Caught
in
a
Blizzard
If
you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things
to
do
to
summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-37
Tie a red cloth
to
your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats
-
anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing
to
keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly
CO
(carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO
could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see
it
or
smell
it,
so you might not know
it
is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base
of
your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little
on
the side
of
the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep
CO
out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make
it
go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-38
Then, shut the engine
off
and close the window almost
all the way
to
preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so
until
help comes.
If
You
Are
Stuck:
In
Sand,
Mud,
Ice
or Snow
In order
to
free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need
to
spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If
you let your tires spin at high speed, they
~ can explode, and you or others could be
~ injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
~
~ the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above
35
mph
(55
km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires.
If
you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see
Tire Chains
on
page
5-60.
4-39
Rocking
Your
Vehicle
To
Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels.
If
you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift
into
4HI.
Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE
(R)
and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
Using the Recovery
Hooks
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
Or, you can use your recovery hooks
if
your vehicle
has them. If you do need
to
be towed out, see
Towing
Your
Vehicle
on
page
4-42.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
your vehicle. You may need
to
use them
if
you’re stuck
off-road and need
to
be pulled
to
some place where
you can continue driving.
You
Out
after
a
few
tries,
You
may
need
to
be
towed
Out. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of
4-40
These hooks, when used, are under a lot
of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull
on
the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break
off
and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice:
Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and
it
would
not be covered by warranty.
4-41
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable that a
two-wheel-drive vehicle is to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground, the propeller shaft to axle yoke
orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft
removed following the applicable service manual
removaVinstallation procedure.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft
if
proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the truck.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
i
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1.
Firmly set the parking brake.
2.
Shift the transmission to PARK
(P).
3.
Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4.
Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL
(N).
See
“Four-wheel Drive” in the Index for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
4-43
5.
Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
Dolly
Towing
being towed
is
firmly attached
to
the towing
vehicle. Your vehicle was not designed to be dolly towed. If you
need
to
tow your vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier
6.
Turn the ignition off and remove the key. If the key
i
‘his section.
is not removed, the battery will drain.
SI
9
a four- lee
e
vehicle’s trans
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park
(P).
You
or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission
is
in
Park (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake
is
firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
4-44
Loading
Your
Vehicle
GAWR
FRT
GAWR
RR
I
RIM
COLD
TIRE
PRESSURE
nu
nu
ER’S
MANUAL
FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATIONn
The CertificationRire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the
size of your original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
weight,
if
pulling a trailer.
The CertificationKire label also tells
you
the maximum
on your front and rear axles, you need to go
to
a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And,
if
you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it
out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire
label on your truck or consult your dealer for
additional details.
Do not loac.
,
ou
__
3
any heavier than
-..
2
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR.
If
you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components
to
get added
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To
find out the actual loads dealer
to
help you load your vehicle the right way.
4-45
Notice:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If
you put things inside your vehicle
-
like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else
-
they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or
if
there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in
a crash.
Put things
in
the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle
so
that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Don’ zave an unsecurc ch..- re:-..
t
in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure
it
whenever you can.
Don’t leave
a
seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual.
Adding
a
Snow
Plow
or Similar
Equipment
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended
for
a
snow plow.
Notice:
Adding a snow plow or similar equipment
to your vehicle can damage
it,
and the repairs
wouldn’t be covered by warranty.
Do
not install a
snow plow or similar equipment
on
your vehicle.
4-46
Towing
a
Trailer
If
you do..
-
use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull
a
trailer. For example,
if
the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well
--
or even
at
all.
You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only
if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty.
To
pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance
is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers.
So
please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-47
If
You Do Decide To
Pull
A
Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
e
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving.
A
good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using
a
sway control
if
your trailer will
weigh 4,000 Ibs. (1 816 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control
if
your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 Ibs.
(1
816 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t
tow a trailer
at
all during the first
500
miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first
500
miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50
mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts
at
full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
With an automatic transmission, you can tow in
DRIVE
(D).
You may want
to
shift the transmission
to
THIRD
(3)
or,
if
necessary, a lower gear
selection
if
the transmission shifts
too
often
(eg., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
Three important considerations have
to
do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-48
Weight
of
the Trailer
How
heavy can a trailer safely be?
It
depends on how you plan
to
use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle
is
used
to
pull a trailer are all important. And,
it
can also depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle.
Look
in the following chart
to
find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
2WD TRAILBLAZER
(L6
Engine)
4WD TRAILBLAZER (L6 Engine)
2WD TRAILBLAZER EXT
(L6
Engine)
4WD TRAILBLAZER EXT
(L6
Engine)
4-49
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write
to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
163-
005
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1
H
8P7
Weight
of
the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to
measure because
it
affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And
if
you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load
to
the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight,
too.
See Loading
Your
Vehicle
on
page
4-45
for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
4-50
A
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight
(A)
should be
10
percent
to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight
(B).
Do
not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see
if
the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to
get them
right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door.
Then, be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important
to
have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
e
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 Ibs. (1
816
kg), be sure
to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important
for
proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
e
Will you have
to
make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide
(CO)
from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle. Dirt and water can,
too.
4-51
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road
if
it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them
to
the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag
on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than
1,500
Ibs.
(680
kg)
loaded, then
it
needs its own brakes
-
and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes
so
you’ll be able
to
install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only
if:
(20
650
kPa) of pressure.
The trailer parts can withstand
3,000
psi
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02
cubic inch
(0.3
cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid
to
the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this.
If
you
do,
it will bend and finally break
off.
Use steel brake tubing.
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide
(CO)
could come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell
CO.
It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
To
maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting
on
your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-52
L
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle.
Do
not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle.
See
“Climate Controls” in
the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to
be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need
to
go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer
to
the left, just move that hand
to the left.
To
move the trailer to the right, move your
hand
to
the right. Always back up slowly and,
if
possible,
have someone guide you.
4-53
Making Turns
Notice:
Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even
if
the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s
important
to
check occasionally
to
be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift
to
a
lower gear
before
you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have
to
use your brakes
so
much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE
(D).
You may want to shift the
transmission
to
THIRD
(3)
or
a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil
at
a
lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar
to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off.
If
you do get
the overheat warning, see
Engine Overheating on
page
5-25.
4-54
Parki
EJ
on
Hills
You really should not park
1
lr vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on
a
hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But
if
you ever have
to
park your rig
on
a hill, here’s
how
to
do it:
1.
Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK
(P)
yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2.
Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3.
When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4.
Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK
(P).
5.
Release the regular brakes.
U
It
can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever
is
not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle
If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
If
the transfer case on four-wheel drive
vehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be
free to roll, even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P).
So,
be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear
--
not in NEUTRAL.
See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer
Case)” in the Index.
4-55
When
You
Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a
Hill
1.
Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, ana
release the parking brake.
2.
Let up on the brake pedal.
3.
Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4.
Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
brake system. Each
of
these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea
to
review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically
to
see that all hitch nuts and
bolts
are tight.
4-56
Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle may be equipped with a seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached
to
a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire
harness contains the following trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left StopRurn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
If you need
to
tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
trailer brake controller. These wires are located
inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel. These wires should be connected
to
an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a
qualified service center.
4-57
Section
5
Service and Appear
ce
Care
Service
............................................................
5.3
Doing Your Own Service Work
.........................
5-3
Adding Equipment
to
the Outside
of Your Vehicle
...........................................
5-4
Fuel
................................................................
5-5
Gasoline Octane
............................................
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
....................................
5-5
California Fuel ...............................................
5-5
Additives
.......................................................
5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries
..............................
5-6
Filling Your Tank
...........................................
5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
.......................
5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood
....................
5-10
Hood Release
..............................................
5-10
Engine Compartment Overview
.......................
5-12
Engine Oil ................................................... 5-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
................................ 5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
.........................
5-21
Engine Coolant
.............................................
5-23
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................. 5-25
Engine Overheating
.........
.......
5-25
Cooling System
..........................
.......
5-28
Engine Fan Noise
..............................
,
......
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
.........................
....
5.35
Windshield Washer Fluid
...........................
5-35
Brakes
........................................................
5.36
Battery
........................................................
5.39
Jump Starting
...............................................
5.40
Rear Axle
.......................................................
5.45
Four-wheel Drive
............................................
5.46
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ................... 5.48
Replacement
Bulbs
.......................................
5.49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
..............
5.50
Tires
..............................................................
5.53
inflation
..
Tire Pressure
................................
5.53
Tire Inspection and Rotation
...........................
5-54
When
It
Is
Time for New Tires
.......................
5-56
Buying New Tires
........................................
5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
..........................
5.57
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................. 5-58
Wheel Replacement
......................................
5.59
Tire Chains
...........................
................
5.60
If a Tire Goes Flat
........................................
5.61
Bulb Replacement .......................
........
5.48
Changing a Flat Tire
.....................................
5-61
Section
5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care
............................................
5.75
Care of Safety Belts
......................................
5.78
Weatherstrips
...............................................
5.78
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
..............
5-78
Sheet Metal Damage
....................................
5.80
Finish Damage
.............................................
5.80
Underbody Maintenance
................................
5-81
Chemical Paint Spotting
.................................
5-81
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ........... 5-81
Cleaning the Inside
of
Your Vehicle
.................
5-75
Vehicle Identification
......................................
5.83
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.............
5.83
Service Parts Identification Label
.................
5.83
Electrical System
.............................
.......
5.84
Add-on Electrical Equipment
...........
.......
5.84
Headlamps
..................................................
5.84
Windshield Wiper Fuses
...............................
5-84
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5.84
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
............................
5-85
Capacities and Specifications
..........................
5.96
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
.......
5.98
5-2
You can be injured and
-
ur vehicle could be
damaged if you try to
do
service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about
it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall
off.
You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment
to
the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add
to
the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment
to
the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of
87
or higher. If the octane is less than
87,
you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87
octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise,
you
might damage
your engine.
A
little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using
87
octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
It
is
recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared
to
other gasoline.
L
Canada Only
California Fuel
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed
to
operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on
page
3-39
)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
5-5
If this occurs, return
to
your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To
provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required
to
contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system
to
work
properly. You should not have
to
add anything
to
your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area
to
contribute
to
clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly
if
they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
Notice:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return
to
your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
5-6
Filling Your
Tank
Fuel vapor
is
highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very
bad
injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind
a
hinged door
on
the
driver’s side
of
your vehicle.
5-7
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it.
If you let go of the cap
too
soon, it will spring back
to
the right.
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen if your tank
is
nearly full, and is more likely
in
hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for
any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle on page
5-78.
When filling the tank
do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the
pump shuts off.
5-8
Checking Things Under
the
Hood
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start
a
fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You
or
others could be burned. Be careful not
to
drop
or spill things that
will
burn onto
a
hot engine.
Hood
Release
1.
To
open the hood, first
pull the handle located
inside the vehicle
on the lower driver’s side
of the instrument
panel.
5-1
0
2.
Then
go
to
the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3.
Lift
the hood; release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the
slot
in
the hood.
5-1
1
a,
r,
a,
a,
v)
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B.
Engine
Air
Cleaner/Filter
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D.
Engine Air CleanedFilter Indicator (If Equipped)
E.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
G. Engine
Oil
Dipstick
H.
Radiator Pressure Cap
I.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
J.
Remote Negative
(-)
Terminal Marked “GND”
K.
Brake Master Cylinder
L.
Battery
M. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
5-1
3
When you open the hood on the
V8
engine, you’ll see the following:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
B.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter F. Engine Oil Fill Cap
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
G.
Radiator Pressure Cap
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
H.
Remote Negative
(-)
Terminal Marked
“GND”
5-1
4
I.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
J.
Brake Master Cylinder
<.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
L.
Battery
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then lift the hood
to
relieve pressure on
the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from
its
slot
in
the hood and return the prop
to
its retainer. Then pull the
hood down firmly
to
close.
It
will latch when dropped
from 6
to
8
inches
(15
to
20
cm) without pressing on
the hood.
Engine
Oil
You
should check your engine oil level regularly; this
is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s
a good idea
to
check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order
to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick
handle is a yellow ring
located in the engine
compartment toward the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page
5-
12
for more
information on location.
Turn
off
the engine and give the oil several minutes
to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove
it
again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
I
I
L6
Engine
5-1
5
I
I
V8
Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the F mark for the
L6
engine or
the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for
the
V8
engine, then you’ll need to add at least one quart
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil
to
use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page
5-96.
Notice:
Don’t add too much oil.
If
your engine has
so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
F
mark that shows the proper operating range for the
L6
engine or above the cross-hatched area for
the
V8
engine, your engine could be damaged.
The engine oil
fill
cap is
located in the engine
compartment toward the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compatfment Overview
on
page
5-
72
for more
information on location.
Be sure to
fill
it enough
to
put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
What Kind
of
Engine
Oil
to
Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the
oil
has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API).
Do
not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
5-1
6
If
you choose to perform
the engine
oil
change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbo! on
the front
of
the
oil
container.
If
you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the
oil
put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity
oil
for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
RECOMMENDED SA€
VISCOSITY
GRADE ENGINE
OILS
HOT
WEATHER
-
"C
38
21
if
4
7
18
I
LOOK
FOR
MIS
SYMBOL
1-11
SAE
IOW-30
ACCEPTABLE
r
IF
5W-30
IS
NOT
-30
AVAILABLE
RECOMMENDED
WEATHER
DO NOT
US€
SAE
low-40,
SAE
20W-58
OR
ANY OTHER
VISCOSITY
GRADE
OIL
NOT
RECOMMENDED
5-1
7
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol,
if
it's going to be
0°F
(-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE IOW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice:
Use only engine
oil
with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@ oil meets all
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme
the requirements for
cold, where the
temperature falls below
-20°F
(-29"C),
it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine
Oil
Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine
Oil
(GM
Oil
Life
System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the
oil
life system
to
work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A
CHANGE
ENG
OIL
light in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will come on. Change your oil
as soon as possible within the next two times you
stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if
you are driving under
the best conditions, the
oil
life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and
at
this time the system must be
reset. It is also important
to
check your
oil
regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles
(5
000
km) since your
last oil change. Remember
to
reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-1
8
How to Reset the CHANGE ENG OIL Light
The GM Oil Life System calculates when
to
change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system
so
it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior
to
a
CHANGE ENG
OIL
light being turned on, reset the
system.
To reset the CHANGE ENG
OIL
light, do the following:
1.
Turn the ignition key
to
RUN with the
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
engine off.
times within five seconds.
For vehicles with the Driver Information Center, see
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page
3-46
to
reset
the system.
What to
Do
with
Used
Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat
to
the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine
Air
Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleanedfilter
is located toward the front
of the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page
5-12
for
more information on engine air cleaner filter location.
5-1
9
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The engine air
cleanedfilter assembly has
an indicator that lets
you know when the air
filter is dirty and needs
to
be serviced. The
indicator is located on the
engine air cleaner/filter
air duct.
2.
Twist out the old engine air cleaner/filter and
3.
Reinstall the cover.
replace
it
with a new one,
if
needed.
The service window
(A)
with the percentage scale
shows the amount of engine air cleaner/filter life used.
When both service window
(A)
and service window
(9)
turn orange, replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
After changing the engine air cleaner/filter, press
the button on top of the indicator to reset it.
For vehicles without an indicator, refer
to
the
maintenance schedule
to
determine when
to
replace the
engine air cleanedfilter.
To
check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1.
Remove the three screws on the engine air
cleaner/filter and lift
off
the cover.
Operatin, ihe engine with the air cLner/filter
off
can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not
only
cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If
it
isn't there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don't drive with
it
off,
and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off.
Notice:
If the air cleanedfilter is
off,
a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it.
Always have the air cleanedfilter
in
place when
you're driving.
5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When
to
Check and Change
A
good time
to
check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every
50,000
miles
(83
000
km)
if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
e
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles
(1
66
000
km).
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
service.
How
to
Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice:
Too
much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission.
Too
much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall
on
hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too
little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading
if
you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level
if
you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above
90°F
(32°C).
At
high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic-especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To
get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F
to
200°F (82°C
to
93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
45
miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(1
0°C).
If
it’s colder than 50°F
(1
OOC), drive the vehicle
in
THIRD
(3)
until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for
10
minutes.
A
cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off,
but this is used only
as
a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes
if
outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than
50°F
(IOOC), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you
must
check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
5-2
1
Checking the
Fluid
Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK
(P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with the
transmission and lock
symbol is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on
page
5-12
for
more information on location.
1.
Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2.
Push
it
back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3.
If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How
to
Add
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on
page
6-15.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it
is
hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L).
Don’t
oveM/.
5-22
Notice:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@
-111,
because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@
-111
is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
@
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down
to
lock the dipstick in place.
described under “How to Check”.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL@ engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to
remain in your vehicle for
5
years or
150,000
miles
(240
000
km), whichever occurs first,
if
you add
only DEX-COOL@ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page
5-25.
A
50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down
to
-34°F (-37°C).
0
Give boiling protection up
to
265°F (129°C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice:
When adding coolant,
it
is
important that
you use only DEX-COOL@ (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000
miles
(50,000 km) or
24
months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@ is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
What
to
Use
Use
a
mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need
to
add anything else.
5-23
Checking
Coolant
.
.dding only ain
WL
D
your coo
____
g
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system
is
set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50
mixture of clean,
drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@
coolant.
Notice:
If
you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water
in
the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If
you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice:
If
you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have
to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve
the
system. These can be harmful.
The engine coolant
recovery tank
is
in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See
Engine
Compartment Overview on
page
5-12
for more
information on location
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be at the base of the filler neck or a little
higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture
at
the coolant recovery tank.
5-24
Radiator Pressure
Cap
Turning the radiator pressure cal ihen the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap
--
even a little
--
when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not
to
spill it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn
if
the engine parts are hot
Occasionally check
the
coolant level in the radiator. For
information on
how
to
add coolant
to
the radiator,
see Cooling System
on
page
5-28.
Notice:
Your pressure cap is a pressure-type cap
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
See “Capacities and Specifications” for more
information.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on
page
5-12
for
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel.
5-25
If
Steam
Is
Coming From
Your
Engine
L
Steam from an over..-ated ens
...
2
can
__
-.rn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine
if
you see or hear steam
coming from
it.
Just turn
it
off
and get
everyone away from the vehicle until
it
cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in
it
can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if
it
overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine
is
cool.
Notice;
If
your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-26
If No Steam
Is
Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be
too
serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little
too
hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill
on
a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1.
In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in neutral
while stopped. If
it
is safe
to
do
so,
pull
off
the road,
shift to
PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N)
and let the
engine idle.
If
you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10
minutes.
If
the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn
off
the engine
and
get everyone out
of
the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-27
Cooling
System
When
you
decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll
see:
B
L6
Engine
A.
B.
C.
V8
Engine
Coolant Recovery Tank
Radiator Pressure Cap
Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is
boiling,
don’t do anything else until it
cools
down. The vehicle
should be parked
on
a level surface.
5-28
The coolant level should
be at least up
to
the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose
all
coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems
to
be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down.
If
it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
Notice:
When adding coolant,
it
is
important that
you use only
DEX-COOL@
(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is
added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
-
at 30,000 miles
(50
000
km) or
24
months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use
of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@ is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
How
to
Add
Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery
Tank
If
you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50
mixture of
clean, drinkable wafer and DEX-COOL@ engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant
on
page
5-23
for more information.
5-29
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.
With
plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get
too
hot
but
you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50
mixture of clean,
drinkable water and
DEX
COOL@ coolant.
Notice:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
e
You can be burned
if
you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and
it
will burn
if
the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL
COLD mark, start
your
vehicle.
5-30
If
the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
I
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and
if
you turn the radiator
pressure cap
--
even a little
--
they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to
cool
if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-31
How
to Add Coolant
to
the Radiator
1.
You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is
no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn.
If
you hear a hiss, wait for that
to
stop.
A
hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2.
Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-32
3.
Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture, up
to
the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page
5-23
for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then
fill
the coolant recovery tank
to
the
FULL
5.
Put
the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
COLD mark.
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-33
Engine Fan Noise
6.
Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7.
By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base
of
the filler neck.
8.
Then replace the pressure cap.
At
any time during
this procedure
if
coolant begins
to
flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight.
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster
to
provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts.
It
is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
You
may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine.
It
will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
,,..
.
,
.
...
.
,.
.
.~,__l
"
..".<
:
:
."I".
.
-
.
"
.,
...
"
I
."
~
.
_,
I
"
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in the
1
engine compartment.
It
is on the passenger's side
of vehicles with the L6
engine and is on the
driver's side of vehicles
with the
V8
engine.
When
to
Check Power Steering Fluid
It
is not necessary
to
regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid
loss
in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page
5-12
for reservoir location.
How
to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a
clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
For vehicles with the L6 engine, the level should be at
the
C
(cold) mark. For vehicles with the
V8
engine,
the level should be at the FULL mark. If necessary, add
only enough fluid
to
bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on
page
6-15.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page
5-
12
for reservoir
location.
5-35
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
So,
it isn’t a good idea
to
“top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have
too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work
is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking
Brake
Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
I
If you have too n,,:h brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is
hot enough.
You
or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer
to
the Maintenance Schedule
to
determine when
to
check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page
6-
13.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the
MIN
but not over the
MAX
mark.
What
to
Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3
brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page
6-
15.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
5-37
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer
if
the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or
if
there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its
many
parts have
to
be of top quality and work well together
if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system
-
for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in
-
be sure
you get new approved
GM
replacement parts.
If
you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example,
if
someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change
-
for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways
if
someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco@ battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page
5-72
for battery location.
Warning:
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known
to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for
25
days or
more, remove the black, negative
(-)
cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
5-39
Batteries ha\
-
xic.
_.._.:
can burn
;
gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how
to
prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also,
for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (RDS Radios) on page
3-94.
Jump Starting
If
your battery has run down, you may want
to
use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps
to
do it
safely.
.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
They contain enough electricity to
ignite.
burn you.
If
you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it
won’t work, and
it
could damage your vehicle.
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with
a
negative ground system.
5-40
Notice:
If
the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2.
Get the vehicles close enough
so
the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles roiling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
Notices
If you leave your radio on,
it
could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3.
Turn
off
the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets (if equipped).
Turn
off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed.
This will avoid sparks and help
to
save both
batteries. And it could save your radio!
4.
Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has
a
remote negative
(-)
jump
starting terminal. You should always use this
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
battery. The remote negative
(-)
terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket and is marked
“GND.”
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page
5-72
for more in‘ mation on location.
.
Using a match near
a
battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You
don’t need to add water to the ACDelco@
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid
is
there.
If
it
is low, add water
to take care of that first.
If
you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get
it
on you.
If
you accidentally get
it
in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-41
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive
(+)
will go
to
positive
(+)
or to a remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the vehicle has one. Negative
(-)
will go
to
a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to
a remote
negative
(-)
terminal
if
the vehicle has one. Don’t
connect positive
(+)
to negative
(-)
or you’ll get
a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts
too.
And don’t connect the negative
(-)
cable to the negative
(-)
terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
Connect the red
positive
(+)
cable to the
positive
(+)
terminal of the
dead battery. Use
a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the vehicle
I
has one.
7.
Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive
(+)
terminal
of
the good battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the vehicle
has one.
5-42
1
8.
Now connect the black
negative
(-)
cable
to
the
negative
(-)
terminal
of the good battery. Use
a remote negative
(-)
terminal
if
the vehicle
has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative
(-)
cable
doesn’t
go
to
the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to
the remote
negative
(-)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. In the
L6
engine, the remote negative
(-)
terminal is located on the front engine lift bracket
and is marked “GND.” In the
V8
engine, the remote
negative
(-)
terminal
is
located
on
the accessory
drive bracket and is marked “GND’.
9.
Connect the other end of
the negative
(-)
cable
to
the remote negative
(-)
terminal on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
10.
Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11.
Try
to
start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice:
Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting
if
jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-43
B\
I
(0
Jumper Cable Removal
A.
Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
B.
Good Battery or Remote Positive
(+)
and Remote
C.
Dead Battery or Remote Positive
(+)
Terminal
Negative
(-)
Terminal
Negative
(-)
Terminals
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1.
Disconnect the black negative
(-)
cable from the
2.
Disconnect the black negative
(-)
cable from the
3.
Disconnect the red positive
(+)
cable from the
4.
Disconnect the red positive
(+)
cable from the other
vehicle that had the dead battery.
vehicle with the good battery.
vehicle with the good battery.
vehicle.
5-44
Four-wheel
Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part
C:
Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
on
page
6-
13.
How
to Check Lubricant
If
the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll
need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part
D:
Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants
on
page
6-15.
Front
Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
5-46
How to
Check
Lubricant
To
get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If
the level is below the bottom
of
the filler plug hole,
you may need
to
add some lubricant.
When the differential
is
cold, add enough lubricant
to
raise the level
to
1/2
inch
(12
mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant
to
raise the level
to
the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to
Use
Refer
to
the Maintenance Schedule
to
determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part
D:
Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page
6-
15.
5-47
Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page
5-49.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Taillamps
and
Turn Signal Lamps
1.
Open the liftgate.
2.
Remove the two
screws from the lamp
assembly.
3.
Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5-48
4.
5.
Unclip the wiring harness
(A)
and remove the three
socket retaining screws
(B).
Remove the socket
by
releasing the retaining tabs.
5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page
5-98
for the proper type of replacement blade.
Notice:
Use care when removing
or
installing
a blade assembly. Accidental bumping can cause
the arm to fall back and strike the windshield.
1.
To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until
it
locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C.
Locking Tab
5-50
D.
Blade Pivot
E.
Hook
Slot
F.
Arm
Hook
2.
Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3.
Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
P
4.
To
install the new wiper insert, slide the insert
(D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws
(A).
Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps
(C)
will be forced
off
as the insert is fully
inserted.
5.
Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked
on
both sides of the insert
slots.
5-51
C
6.
Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7.
Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on
page
5-50
in this section for instructions on how
to
change the
!
will
backglass wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade
not lock in a vertical position like the windshield
wiper blade, so care should be used when pulling
away from the vehicle. it
A.
Claw in Notch
B.
Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5-52
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer.
If
you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see
your GM Warranty booklet for details.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as
a
result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Overini tires are
II
‘e likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact
-
such as when you
hit
a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure
The CertificationR7re label, which is on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than
1
mile
(1.6
km).
5-53
Nofices
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not.
If
your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If
your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When
to
Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How
to
Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure.
You
can’t tell
if
your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
7,500
miles
(12
500
km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for
New Tires on page 5-56 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-59 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire
on
page 5-61.
The purpose of regular rotation is
to
achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part
A:
Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section
6,
for scheduled
rotation intervals.
5-54
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificationflire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications
on
page
5-96.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which
it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come
off
and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get
all
the rust or dirt
off.
See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-55
When
It
Is
Time
for
New Tires
One way
to
tell when it’s
time for new tires is
to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire
if
any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
around the tire.
tire’s rubber.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size
of
tires you need, look at
the Certificationnire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue
to
have tires that are designed
to
give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-56
Uniform Tire
Quality
Grading
Mixing tires coul, cause you to lose cor.,.
JI
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
If
you use bias-ply tires
on
your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving.
A
tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear
200
Traction
AA
Temperature
A
The following information relates
to
the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of
10
to
12
inches
(25 to
30
cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-57
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150
would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due
to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-
AA,
A,
B,
C
The traction grades, from highest
to
lowest, are
AA,
A,
B,
and
C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A
tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
-
A,
B,
C
The temperature grades are
A
(the highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to
the generation
of heat and
its
ability
to
dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire
to
degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to
sudden tire failure. The grade
C
corresponds
to
a level
of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory
to
give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However,
if
you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need
to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need
to
be rebalanced.
5-58
Wheel
Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer
if
any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
I
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous.
It
could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a
collision
in
which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance
to
the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page
5-67
for more
information.
5-59
Used
Repiecement
Wheels
.
~g a used
\I
sel on your vt
-.-
__
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven.
It
could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
If
you have to
replace a wheel, use a new
GM
original
equipment wheel.
Tire
Chains
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only
if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions.
To
help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device
if
it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If
you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
5-60
If
a Tire Goes Flat
It’s
unusual for a tire
to
“blowout” while you’re driving,
especially
if
you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire,
it’s
much more likely
to
leak out slowly.
But
if
you should ever have a “blowout”, here are a few
tips about what to expect and what
to
do:
If
a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer
to
maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A
rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle
to
go.
It
may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake
to
a stop
-
well off the road
if
possible.
If
a tire goes flat, the next part shows how
to
use your
jacking equipment
to
change a flat tire safely.
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
Chan,..lg a tire can cause an
ina
’y. The
vehicle can slip
off
the
jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1.
Set the parking brake firmly.
2.
Put the shift lever
in
PARK
(P).
3.
If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear
-
not in NEUTRAL..
4.
Turn
off
the engine.
5.
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side of the vehicle, at the
opposite end.
If
a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly
to
a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
5-61
Removing
the
Spare Tire and
Tools
I
I
The
following steps will tell
you
how to use the jack and
change a
tire.
5-62
TrailBlazer EXT
The jacking equipment
you
will need is stored under the
rear seat in the TrailBlazer or in the left rear quarter
panel storage compartment in the TrailBlazer EXT. See
Rear Seat Operation
on
page
7-6
for
more information
on accessing the jacking equipment.
A
The tools you’ll be using include the wheel wrench
(A),
tire blocks
(B),
extension(s) (socket end)
(C),
handle
(jack end)
(D),
and jack (E). The Trailblazer EXT
will include an additional extension
The following instructions explain
how
to
remove the
spare tire mounted underneath your vehicle.
Notice:
Never remove or restow a tire from/to a
storage position under the vehicle while the vehicle
is
supported
by
a jack. Always tighten the tire
fully
against the underside
of
the vehicle when
restowing.
5-63
1.
To remove the underbody-mounted spare, insert
the socket end of the extension on a
45
“angle
downward into the hoist drive shaft hole. It is
exposed when the rear gate is open and is just
above the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end of
the extension connects into the hoist shaft.
2.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
If
the spare tire does not lower
to
the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not
to
lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later in
this section.
When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through
the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under
the vehicle.
Notice:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do
not
drive
the vehicle before the cable is restored.
3.
Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
4.
Use the chisel end
of
the wheel wrench
to
pry off
the center cap.
See “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire” later in this section
to
continue changing
the flat tire.
5-64
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It’s
designed
to
stop the spare or flat road tire from
suddenly falling
off
your vehicle
if
the cable holding the
spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch
to
work, the tire must be stored with the valve stem
pointing up. See “Storing a Flat Tire and Tools” for
instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide
off
the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side
of
you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
I
I
I
5-65
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do
the following:
1.
Check under the
vehicle
to
see
if
the
cable is visible.
4.
Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers
to
the ground, continue with
Step
2
of “Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools”
earlier in this section.
approximately
6
inches
(1
5 cm) of cable is exposed.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
2.
If it is not visible, proceed to Step 6.
If visible, first try
to
tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until
you
hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice.
You
cannot overtighten
the cable.
3.
Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns. 6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.
7.
Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
5-66
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10.
Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack
out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
9.
Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
If
the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
jack handle, extension and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper, on an angle, and turn
the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare the rest
of
the way.
11.
Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
12.
if
the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-67
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1.
Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
2.
Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
3.
Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
Don’t remove them yet.
raise the jack lift head.
the jack.
Front
I
L
Rear
D.
Extension(s)
E. Wheel Wrench
A.
Frame
B.
Jack
C.
Handle
5-68
4.
Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
I
ITunder a vehicle when
it
is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips
off
the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when
it
is
supported only by a jack.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.
To
help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5.
Raise the vehicle
by
turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground
so
there is enough room for the spare
tire
to
fit.
6.
Remove all the wheel nuts and take
off
the flat tire.
5-69
7.
Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
Rust
or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which
it
is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come
off
and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall
off,
causing a serious accident.
8.
Place the spare
on
the wheel mounting surface.
9.
Put
the nuts on by hand.
Make sure the rounded
end
is
toward the wheel.
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt
off.
10.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel
is
held
against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
5-70
.a
11.
Lower the vehicle
by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
12.
Use the wrench
to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in
a
crisscross
sequence as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come
off.
This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts.
If
you have to replace them, be sure to
get new
GM
original equipment wheel
nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100
Ib-ft
(140
N*m
).
Notice:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To
avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
5-71
Storing a
F'-&
--
Spare Tire
and
Tools
-
Storing a jack, a tire,
or
other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury.
In
a sudden stop or collision,
.
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing
up.
If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem
pointing downward,
its
secondary latch won't
work properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle.
If
this
happened when your vehicle was being driven,
CAUTION: (Continued)
I I
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and,
of
course, damage
to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with
its valve stem pointing up.
I
Notice:
An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing
it
that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.
Follow
this diagram
to
store the underbody-mounted
spare.
5-72
A.
Wheel Wrench
B.
Hoist Shaft
C.
Extension(s)
9;
Retainer
E.
Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1.
Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed up and
to
the rear.
2.
Pull the retainer through the wheel.
3.
Put the socket end of the extension, on an angle,
through the hole in the rear bumper and into the
hoist shaft.
4.
Raise the tire fully against the underside
of
the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip
twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and the
cable
is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
PUSH
&
PULL
5.
Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench
to
tighten the cable.
5-73
Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel
blocks to the proper location in the vehicle.
Roll
up the instruction label and return it to
the slot in the tool kit.
TrailBlazer
TrailBlazer
EXT
A.
Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C.
Extension(s)
D.
Wheel Blocks and Jack
5-74
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can
-
before
they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change
to
a clean
area often.
A
soft brush may be used
if
stains are
stubborn.
If
a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1.
Vacuum and brush the area to remove
any loose dirt.
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
2.
Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
3.
Follow the directions on the container label.
4.
Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
5.
As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
sponge
to
remove any excess cleaner.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2.
If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
3.
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
described earlier.
the area with a watedbaking soda solution:
1
teaspoon (5
ml)
of baking soda
to
1
cup
(250
ml)
of lukewarm water.
4.
Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2.
Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3.
If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6.
Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7.
Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-76
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth
to
remove dirt. You
may have
to
do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally.
Do
not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
immediately. If dirt is allowed
to
work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
Top
of
the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to
see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often.
GM
Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page
5-8
1.
Notice:
Don’t use abrasive cleaners
on
glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped
off
later. If abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
5-77
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do
r
bleach or dye safety belts.
If
you do,
it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part
D:
Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page
6-15.
Cleaning the Outside of
Your
Vehicle
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is
to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of
the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely.
You
can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page
5-81.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives.
All
cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel
to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap
to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.’’
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of
color, gloss retention and durability.
5-78
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
on
page
5-8
1.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
Notice:
Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish
if
they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible.
If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years.
You
can help
to
keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim,
if
necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim.
To
avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap
to
clean aluminum.
A
coating of
wax, rubbed
to
high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or
if
the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
is
clean
if
beads do
not
form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick
to
the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-79
Aluminum
Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface.
Do
not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To
clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice:
When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe
off
any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If
your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material
to
parts repaired or
replaced
to
restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-80
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20
000
km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
I
Usage
Polish stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome
and
Wire
Wheel
Cleaner from chrome wheels and
Removes dirt and grime
wire wheel covers.
5-81
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Usage
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes
spots
and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on Daae
6-15.
5-82
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove
box.
It’s
very helpful
if
you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it
if
you
look
through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
0
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-83
Electrical
System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Nofice:
Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical
to
your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page
1-58.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. An
electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse.
If
the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is
too
heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-84
Fuses
and
Circuit Breakers Engine Compartment Fuse
Block
The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page
5-12
for more
information on location.
Remove the primary cover by pressing the two locking
tabs. Remove the secondary cover by snapping off
while lifting. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, reverse
the sequence.
5-85
lo1 lo1
/o
/$I
I
Fuses
I
Usage
I
Fuses
I
Usaae
I
___
Crank
Air Baa
I
1 Electrically-Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Electric Brake
Coolina Fan
I
2
1
I
20
I
3 Horn
lanition
E
22
23
Electronic Throttle Control
I
5
I
24
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
I
6
Automatic Shift Lock Control
Svstem
7
Engine 1
Back-up
Powertrain Control Module 1
8
Windshield Wipers
9
Automatic Transfer Case
10
I
Powertrain Control Module
5
I
I
I
29 Oxvaen Sensor
I
11
I
Fog
Lamps
1
30
Truck Bodv Controller
31 Airconditioning
13
I
Cigarette Lighter
I
I
I
32 Trailer
33 Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
-
5-87
Fuses Usage
35 Blower Motor
Fuses Usage
41 Fuel Pumr,
I
36
I
lanition B
I
I
50
I
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
I
51
Usaae
Relays
Hazard Flashers
52
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
~
37
Rear Window Washer
38
Blank
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
42
Hiah-Beam Headlamr, 43
Windshield Wipers/Washer
~
~~_______
44
Cooling Fan 45
Air Conditioning
I
46
I
Headlamr, Driver Module
I
I
47
I
Starter
Miscellaneous Usage
48
Blank 49
Instrument Panel Battery
5-88
1281
1261
m
I
I
1
1161
m
/s
1
m
I
I
I
I* I
I
1151
I
Fuses
I
Usaae
I
I
Fuses
I
Usage
I
I I
1
Electrically-Controlled Air
Susgension
I
2 Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
3 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
4
Back-Up-Trailer Lamgs
5
Driver’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
6
7
WASH
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
8
Windshield Wipers
9
Automatic Transfer Case
18
I
Air Bag
19
Cooling Fan
20
Electric Brake
I
21 Horn
lanition E
Electronic Throttle Control
I
24
25
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver-
Information Center
Automatic Shift Lock Control
Svstem
I
26
I
Engine
1
27
Truck Body Controller 31
Air
Conditioning
30
Powertrain Control Module
1
28 Back-up
Trailer
32
I
33
I
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
I
I
34
I
Ignition A
I
35
I
I
Blower Motor
lanition B
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
5-90
Fuses Usage
53 Oxygen Sensor Bank A
54
Injector Bank A
55
Oxygen Sensor Bank B
I
56
I
lniector Bank B
I
I
Relays
I
Usage
I
37 Headlamp Washer
38 Rear Window Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41
Windshield Wiperswasher 42
Fuel Pump
43
Air Conditioning 44
High-Beam Headlamp
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module
I
48
1
Instrument Panel Battery
I
Rear Underseat Fuse
Block
5-91
27m
0
TrailBlazer
Fuses Usage
01
Right Door Control Module
I
02
I
Left Door Control Module
I
I
03
I
Liftgate Module
2
I
I
04
I
Truck Bodv Controller
3
I
05
06
Rear Fog Lamps
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module
I
07
I
Truck Body Controller
2
I
08
I
Power Seats
I
~ ~~~~~
09
Driver Door Module 10
Blank
11
Passenger Door Module 12 Amplifier
13
Auxiliarv Power 2
15
Left Rear Parking Lamps
14
Rear Climate Controls
16
I
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
17
LOCKS
18
Right Rear Parking Lamps
I
19
I
Blank
I
I
21
I
LOCK
5-92
I
Fuses
Usage
I
41
I
Radio
47
I
Ignition
0
I
48
I
Four-wheel Drive
I
49
1
Blank
I
50
I
Truck
Bodv
Controller Iqnition
~ ~
51
1
Brakes
1
52
I
Truck
Body
Controller Run
5-93
UNLOCK
26B 27m
30i
PARK LP
31
33m
JUU
Fuses Usage
01
Riqht Door Control Module
02
Liftqate Module
2
03
Left Door Control Module
04
Rear Foq Lamps 05
Truck Body Controller 3
06
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module
I
I
07
I
Truck Bodv Controller
2
08
Rear Wiper
09
Power Seats
I
10
I
Driver Door Module
I
11
Passenqer Door Module
12
Amplifier
~~~~~ ~ ~~~~ ~ ~ ~~
13
Left Rear Parking Lamps 14
Rear Climate Controls
15
16
Auxiliary Power
2
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
17
LOCK§ 18
Right Rear Parking Lamps
19
Vent Window
20
Blank
1
21
I
LOCK
TrailBlazer
EXT
5-94
I
Fuses
I
Usage
I
I
22
I
Retained Accessow Power
-1
23
I
Blank
24
Blank 25
UNLOCK
26
OH
Battery/OnStar@ System
27
Blank
28
RainsenseTM Wipers 29
Sunroof
34
I
Vehicle STOP
I
I
35
I
Blank
I
36 Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioninq B
Fuses
Front Parkinq Lamps
37 Usage
I
38
I
Left Turn Sianal
I
"
39 Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioninq
1
Riqht Turn Siqnal
I
44
I
Heat Ventilation Air Conditionina
I
I
45
I
Rear Foq Lamps
I
I
46
I
Auxiliaw Power
1
I
I
47
I
Ignition
o
I
I
48
I
Four-wheel Drive
I
I
49
I
Blank
I
I
50
I
Truck Bodv Controller lanition
I
I
51
I
Brakes
I
52
I
Truck Bodv Controller Run
I
5-95
Capacities
and
Specifications
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
I
VIN
Code
I
Transmission
I
Spark Plug Gap
I
Firing Order
I
“VORTECTM
”
4200 L6
IsI
.042 inches
M30
I
(1.07 mm) 1-5-3-6-2-4
“VORTECTM
”
5300
V8
M30 T 0.060 inches
(1.52 mm) 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3
L6 Engine
V8
Engine
Application English Metric English Metric
Wheel Nut Torque
100
Ib ft 140
Nam
100
Ib
ft 140
N*m
Cooling System
TrailBlazer 13.9 quarts 13.1
L
-
-
TrailBlazer EXT 15.2 quarts 14.4
L
17.9 quarts 17.0
L
Air Conditioninu Refriaerant R/134a
TrailBlazer 1.9 Ibs.
0.9
kg
_.
-
TrailBlazer EXT 2.8
Ibs.
1.27
kg 2.8
Ibs.
1.27 kg
Engine Oil with Filter
7.0
quarts 6.6
L
6.0 quarts 5.7 L
Transmission
(Drain and Refill) 5.0 quarts 4.7
L
5.0 quarts 4.7
L
5-96
Fuel Tank
All
capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to
fill
to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after fillina.
I
5-97
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Part
Number
Engine Oil Filter
L6
P
F44*
V8
PF58*
--
I
Enaine Air Cleaner A20
1
4C"
"
Automatic Transmission Filter
Kit
GM
Part
No.
24200796
SDark Pluas
I
L6
4
1
-974*
V8
41 -981
*
Fuel Filter
20.0 inches (50.8 cm)
Windshield Wiper Blade
GF831*
*ACDelco@
part
number
14.0 inches (35.6 cm) Backglass Wiper Blade
5-98
Section
6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
......................................
6.2
Introduction
...................................................
6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
....................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements
..............................
6-2
How This Section is Organized
.........................
6.3
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services
...........
6.4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
....................
6.4
Scheduled Maintenance
...................................
6.5
Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services
.................
6-9
At Each Fuel Fill
............................................
6-9
At Least Once a Month
..
....
............
6.10
At Least Twice a Year
....
............
6.10
At Least Once a Year
...................................
6.11
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
........
-6-1 3
Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
............................
6-13
Exhaust System Inspection
............................
6.14
Fuel System Inspection
..................................
6.14
Engine Cooling System Inspection
...................
6.14
Transfer Case and Front Axle (Four-wheel
Drive) Inspection
.......................................
6.14
Brake System Inspection
................................
6.14
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
....
6.15
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.17
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGiNE
OIL
'
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL
AND CHANGE
AS
RECOMMENDED
Plan
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or
your dealer
for details.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps
to
keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment.
All
recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level
of
emissions from your vehicle.
To
help protect
our environment, and
to
keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary
to
keep your vehicle in good
working condition.
Any
damage caused by failure
to
follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
6-2
How
This Section
is
Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should
let
your dealer’s service department or another
qualified service center do these jobs.
Perl ming maintenance ~~ Jrk on a
.
-hit.-
can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured.
Do
your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
If
you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the
work.
“Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when.
It
also explains what
you can easily do
to
help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary
to
help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part
E:
Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed
to
qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
If you want
to
get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on
page
7-
10.
6-3
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil scheduled maintenance
which explains the engine oil life system and how
it indicates when to change the engine oil and filter.
Also,
listed are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using
Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive.
If
you
have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine
GM
parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part
D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these.
All
parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
e
e
e
e
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationnire label. See Loading
Your
Vehicle
on
page 4-45.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving with
Your
Four-
Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
on
page 4-14.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on
page 5-5.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up
to
100,000
miles
(166
000
km) should be repeated after
100,000
miles
(166
000
km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at
150,000
miles
(240
000
km) should be repeated at the same interval
after
150,000
miles
(240
000
km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part 6: Owner Checks and Services on page
6-9
and Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page
6-
13.
Footnotes
t
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+
A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page
6-14.
Engine
Oil
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine
oil
and filter as indicated by the
GM
Oil
Life System (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when
to
change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not
on
mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an
oil
change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
two times you stop for fuel.
It
is possible that,
if
you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset.
It
is also important
to
check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at
3,000
miles (5
000
km) since your
last oil change. Remember
to
reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page
5-15
for information on resetting the system.
6-5
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in Part
E
of this schedule.
An
Emission Control Service.
7,500
Miles (12
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
0
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
15,000
Miles
(25
000
km)
0
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
t.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection
and
Rotation
on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
22,500
Miles
(37
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
U
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection
and
Rotation on
30,000
Miles
(50
000
km)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection
and
Rotation
on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
Replace fuel filter.
An
Emission Control Service. (See
footnote
f.)
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An
Emission
Control Service.
37,500
Miles (62
500
km)
U
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+,)
0
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
6-6
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
CI
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
t.)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
0
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
50,000
Miles
(83
000
km)
0
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if
the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C) or
higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses
such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If
you
do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000
miles
(I
66
000
km).
0
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case
fluid.
52,500 Miles (87
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
CI
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
60,000
Miles (100 000 km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page
5-54
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
0
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote
t.)
U
Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
67,500 Miles (1 12
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
6-7
75,000
Miles
(125
000
km)
0
Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if
you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter
if
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote
f.)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page
5-54
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
Ll
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
82,500
Miles
(137
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page
5-54
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
D
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
90,000 Miles (150
000
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0
Replace fuel filter.
An
Emission Control Service. (See
Footnote
t.)
0
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An
Emission
c1
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
Control Service.
page
5-54
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
97,500 Miles (162
500
km)
0
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
page
5-54
for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote
+.)
0
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation
on
100,000 Miles (166
000
km)
0
V8
Engine Only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An
U
Replace spark plugs.
An
Emission Control Service.
U
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these conditions:
Emission Control Service.
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches
90°F
(32°C) or
higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-8
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid
if
necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid
on
page 5-35 for further
details.
At Least Once
a
Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget
to
check your spare tire. See Tires
on
page 5-53 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every
50
hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-58 for further details.
At Least Twice a
Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
6-1
0
Also
look for any opened or broken air bag coverings.
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield.
Also
see
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle
on
page 5-78.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated
to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then
try
to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrenchhatchet to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-6
1.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine air
cleaner filter restriction indicator located on the air
cleaner in the engine compartment. The indicator lets
you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs
to
be changed. Check the indicator at least twice a year
or when your engine oil is changed, whichever
occurs first. See Engine Air C/eaner/Filter
on page
5-19
for more information. Inspect your air cleaner filter
restriction indicator more often
if
the vehicle is used in
dusty areas or under
off
road conditions.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or
squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part
D:
Recommended fluids and
Lubricants on page
6-15.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add
if
needed. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page
5-2
1.
A
f
hid
loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if
needed.
At
Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part
D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door
detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge,
locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what
to use. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
I
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake
on
page
2-28
if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately
if
it starts.
3.
Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-1
1
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
C- -1trol Syste--- Check
W
n you are doing
is
check, le
le
could move suddenly.
If
it
does, you or others
could be injured.
Follow
the steps below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around
the
vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2.
Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page
2-28
if
necessary.
Be ready
to
apply the regular brake immediately
if
the vehicle begins to move.
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try
to
move the shift lever out
of PARK
(P)
with normal effort.
If
the shift lever
moves out of PARK
(P),
your vehicle needs service.
3.
With the engine off, turn the key
to
the RUN
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to
turn
the ignition key
to
LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn
to
LOCK only when the
The key should come out only in LOCK.
shift lever is in PARK (P).
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
I-
L,,en you are doing this chec,., rvJr db,licle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there
is
room in front
of
your vehicle in
case
it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-1
2
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
0
To
check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL
(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal.
Do
this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift
to
PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At
least every spring, use plain water
to
flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance.
each spring and fall).
You
should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page
7-
IO.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals
if
necessary.
6-1
3
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page
2-3
7.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if
they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To
help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every
12
months or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary.
A
fluid
loss
could indicate a problem;
check and have it repaired,
if
needed. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
More frequent lubrication may be required on
off-road use.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often
if
your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
6-1
4
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Washer Solvent
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
on
page
5-
15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only
DEX-COOL@ Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page
5-23.
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent or
equivalent.
Usage
Parking Brake
Gable Guides
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis
Lubrication
Front and
Rear Axle
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S.
12377985, in Canada
88901242, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl
#2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No.
U.S.
1052884, in Canada
993294, or equivalent).
DEXRON@
-111
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S.
12377985, in Canada
88901242, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261
I
in Canada 10953455) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification
99861
15.
6-1 5
I
Usage
I
Fluid/Lubricant
AUTO-TRAK
II
Fluid (GM Part No.
Transfer Case U.S. 12378508, in Canada
1 0953626).
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S.
12377985, in Canada
88901242, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Constant
Cateaorv LB or GC-LB.
88901242,
or
equivalent) or lubricant
Velocity U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGl #2,
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No.
US.
12346293, in Canada
992723, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
I
Usage
I
Fluid/Lubricant
I
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel Door
Hinqe
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinaes
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
"
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
weatherstrip
1095301 4, or equivalent).
Conditioning No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437, or
equivalent).
6-1 6
Part
E:
Maintenance
Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the sewice and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages.
Also,
you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-1
7
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-1
9
Maintenance Record
(cont’d)
6-20
Section
7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information
......................
7.2 Reporting Safety Defects
..................................
7.9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
......................
7.2 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center
......................................
7.3 Government
...............................................
7.9
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Telephone (TTY) Users
....
....
.....
7.3 Government
...............................................
7.9
Customer Assistance Offices
................
.....
7.4
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
.....
7-10
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Service Publications Ordering Information
.........
7.10
Disabilities
..................................................
7.5
Roadside Assistance Program
..........................
7.5
Courtesy Transportation
...................................
7.7
7-
1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to
your dealer and
to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved
to
your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner
of
the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO:
If
after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1 020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you
to
call the toll-free number in order
to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left
of
the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first
if
you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed
to
making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if
you continue
to
remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program
to
enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer
to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus
to
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case
will
generally be heard within
40
days.
If
you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available
to
you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200
Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1 804
Telephone: 1-800-955-51
00
This program is available in all
50
states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right
to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center at MyGMLink is a resource for your
GM ownership needs. You can find your specific
vehicle information all in one place.
The
Owner
Center
allows
you
to:
Get e-mail service reminders.
Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual.
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available
to
MyGMLink members.
Refer
to
the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle visit www.MyGMLink.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has PTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1
-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.}
7-3
Customer Assistance
Off
ices
Chevrolet encourages customers
to
call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to
write
to
Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed
to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-51 70
1-800-222-1 020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1
-800-CHEV-USA8 (243-8872)
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
Fax Number: 31 3-381 -0022
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico,
S.
de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma
#
2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Long Distance:
01
1-52-53 29 0 800
01
-800-508-0000
7-4
GM
Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000
toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365
days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems.
If
your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
Toll-free number, 1 -800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
7-5
Roadside
Courtesy Care
provides:
Roadside
Basic
Care
services (as outlined
previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing
(to
the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
0
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery
($5
of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation
will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided
by the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty
to
eligible purchasers of
2003
Chevrolet
passenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your selling
dealer for details.)
Courtesy Care
is available
to
retail and retail lease
customers operating
2003
and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60
000
km),
whichever occurs first. All
Courtesy Care
services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic
Care
and
Courtesy Care
are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right
to
modify
or discontinue
Basic
Care
and
Courtesy Care
at
any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available
to
give to the advisor;
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian
Roadside
Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer
to
the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
7-6
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud
to
offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered
to
retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan
Ahead
When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do
so
as early in
the work day as possible
to
allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However,
if
you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service
to
get you
to
your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride
to
a destination up
to
10
miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up
to
$30
per day (five day maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up
to
$10
per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle
is
unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of
$30.00
per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability.
All
Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian
Vehicles:
For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-8
Reporting
Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If
you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to
notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and
if
it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-01 23 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA,
US.
Department of Transportation
Washington,
D.C.
20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition
to
notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write
to:
Transport Canada
330
Sparks Street
Tower
C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A
ON5
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
to
General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1 020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-51 70
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1
H
8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-1
0
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1
-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551
-41
23
Monday-Friday
8:OO
AM
-
6:OO
PM Eastern
Ti
me
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.
0.
Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-1
1
A
Accessory Power Outlets
.................................
3-18
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment
.........
4-46
Adding Washer Fluid
.......................................
5-36
Additional Program Information
...........................
7-8
Additives, Fuel
.................................................
5-6
Add-on Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-84
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
.............
3-61 ,
Air
Bag
Air Bag Systems
.............................................
1-49
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
.........
1-58
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates?
......
1-56
Where Are the Air Bags?
..............................
1-52
Air
Cleaner/Filter, Engine
.................................
5-1
9
All
Overseas Locations
......................................
7-4
Aluminum Wheels
...........................................
5-80
AM
...............................................................
3-95
Antenna, Fixed Mast
.......................................
3-97
Anti-Lock Brake System
.....................................
4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light
..............
3-38
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-75
Care of Safety Belts
....................................
5-78
Chemical Paint Spotting
...............................
5-81
3-67, 3-76
Readiness Light
..........................................
3-35
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
....................
1-55
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
....................
1-55
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
...................
1-54
Appearance Care (cont.)
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
............
5-75
Finish Damage
............................................
5-80
Sheet Metal Damage
...................................
5-80
Underbody Maintenance
...............................
5-81
Weatherstrips
..............................................
5-78
Ashtrays
........................................................
3-18
Audio Speakers
..............................................
3-84
Audio System(s)
.............................................
3-58
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
......................
3-95
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
................
3-96
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
..................
3-97
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
........................
3-97
Chime Level Adjustment
...............................
3-97
Fixed Mast Antenna
..........
....
3-97
Radio Personalization
........
.... 3-94
Radio with Cassette and CD
.........................
3-65
Radio with CD
............................................
3-59
Radio with Six-Disc CD
................................
3-74
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
................................
3-93
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-58
Theft-Deterrent Feature
................................
3-94
Understanding Radio Reception
.....................
3-95
Automatic Headlamp System
............................
3-14
Automatic Transfer Case
..................................
2-25
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your Vehicle
..............
5-78
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
5-81
Audio Systems
Audio System(s)
1
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
..........................................................
5-21
Automatic Transmission Check
..........................
6-1
1
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
.............................................
6-12
Operation
...................................................
2-22
B
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
.....
....
5-52
Backing Up
................................................
4-53
Battery
..........................................................
5-39
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
.............................
3-55
Battery Replacement
.........................................
2-7
Battery Run-Down Protection
............................
3-1 7
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
.........................
4-32
Before You Drive
............................................
3-83
Body Lubrication Service
..............................
6-1
1
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-28
System Inspection
.......................................
6-14
System Warning Light
..................................
3-37
Brake Adjustment
............................................
5-39
Brake Fluid
....................................................
5-36
Brake Pedal Travel
.........................................
5-39
Brake Wear
...................................................
5-38
Brakes
..........................................................
5-36
Braking in Emergencies
.....................................
4-7
Braking
...........................................................
4-5
Break.ln. New Vehicle
.....................................
2-19
Bulb Replacement
...........................................
5-48
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-49
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
..................
5-48
Buying New Tires
...........................................
5-56
C
California Fuel
..................................................
5-5
Canada
...........................................................
7-4
Canadian Owners
................................................
ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance
...........................
7-6
Capacities and Specifications
............................
5-96
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 4-35, 4-47, 2-31
Care of
Safety Belts
................................................
5-78
Your Cassette Tape Player
............................
3-96
Your CD and DVD Player
.............................
3-97
Your CDs and DVDs
....................................
3-97
Cargo Cover
..................................................
2-49
Cargo Tie Downs
............................................
2-50
Cassette Tape Messages
.................................
3-72
Cassette Tape Player Service
...........................
6-10
Center Seat Position, Child Restraints
................
1-48
Chains, Tires
..................................................
5-60
Charging System Light
....................................
3-36
Check
Engine Light
...............................................
3-39
Gages Warning Light
...................................
3-44
2
CHECK WASHER FLUID
.................................
3-56
Checking Brake Fluid
......................................
5-37
Checking Coolant
............................................
5-24
Checking Engine Oil
........................................
5-15
Checking Things Under the Hood
......................
5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems
......................
1-59
Chemical Paint Spotting
...................................
5-81
Child Restraints
Center Seat Position
..................
,
..
1-48
Child Restraint Systems
...............................
1-35
Infants and Young Children
...........................
1-31
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
..........................
1-40
Older Children
.............................................
1-29
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
..............................
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in
a
Rear
Outside Seat Position
...............................
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
.........................
..
1-46
Top Strap
......................................
......
1-38
Top Strap Anchor Location
............................
1-40
Where
to
Put the Restraint
...........................
1-38
Cigarette Lighter
.............................................
3-1 8
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle
..................................
5-75
Outside of Your Vehicle
................................
5-78
Underbody Maintenance
...............................
5-81
Chime Level Adjustment
..................................
3-97
Cleaning (cont.)
Video Screen
..............................................
3-97
Weatherstrips
..............................................
5-78
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
...................
5-78
Climate Control System
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-31
Dual
..........................................................
3-19
Dual Automatic
............................................
3-22
Rear
..........................................................
3-27
Steering Wheel Controls
...............................
3-31
Compact Disc Messages
.................
3-65, 3-73, 3-83
Compass Calibration
.......................................
2-34
Compass Operation
.........................................
2-34
Compass Variance
..........................................
2-34
Content Theft-Deterrent
....................................
2-17
Control of a Vehicle
..........................................
4-5
Convenience Net
............................................
2-49
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage
............................
3-38
Heater, Engine
............................................
2-21
Cooling System
..............................................
5-28
Cruise Control
................................................
3-10
Cruise Control Light
........................................
3-43
Current and Past Model Order Forms
................
7-11
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
...............................
7-3
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Off ices
...........................
7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities
................................................
7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
....
7-1
0
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government
..............................................
7-9
Government
..............................................
7-9
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information
........
7-1
0
D
Daytime Running Lamps
..........
....
.....
3-15
Defensive Driving
.............................................
4-2
Defogging and Defrosting
.........
.........
3.20. 3-25
Delayed Locking
.........................
...............
2-9
Dinghy Towing
................................................
4-42
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dome Lamps
.................................................
3-17
Door
Delayed Locking
...........................................
2-9
Power Door Locks
.........................................
2-9
Dome Lamp Override
......................................
3-16
Locks
..........................................................
2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
.............
2-1
0
Rear Door Security Locks
.............................
2-12
Driver
Position. Safety Belt
.......................
~ ~ ~
..........
1-14
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
.....................................
3-56
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.........................
3-46
DIC Operation and Displays
..........................
3-46
DIC Warnings and Messages
........................
3-54
At Night
.................................................
4-26
City
...........................................................
4-30
Defensive
.....................................................
4-2
Drunken
.......................................................
4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-31
Hill and Mountain Roads
..............................
4-33
In Rain and on Wet Roads
...........................
4-27
Winter
........................................................
4-35
Driving On Grades
..........................................
4-54
Driving on Snow or Ice
....................................
4-36
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
...............
4-29
Driving Through Flowing Water
.........................
4-29
Driving with a Trailer
.......................................
4-52
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
.............
3-22
Dual Climate Control System
............................
3-19
Driving
DVD
Cleaning the Video Screen
.......................
3-97
Distortion
....................................................
3-95
Rear Seat Entertainment System
...................
3-83
DVD Player
....................................................
3-85
4
E
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment
......................................
5-84
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
...........................
5-85
Power Windows and Other Power Options
......
5-84
Windshield Wiper Fuses
...............................
5-84
Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate
............
2-13
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Engine
Headlamps
.................................................
5-84
Programs
...................................................
3-41
Battery
.......................................................
5-39
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-1 9
Change Engine Oil Light
...............................
3-42
Check and Service Engine Soon Light
............
3-39
Coolant
......................................................
5-23
Coolant Heater
............................................
2-21
Coolant Temperature Gage
...........................
3-38
Cooling System Inspection
............................
6-1 4
Engine Compartment Overview
......................
5-1 2
Exhaust
.....................................................
2-31
Fan Noise
..................................................
5-34
Oil
.............................................................
5-15
Overheating
................................................
5-25
Reduced Power Light
...................................
3-43
Starting
......................................................
2-20
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
...........................................
6-1
0
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
......................
5-85
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/IDLE ENGINE
.............
3-55
Engine Coolant Level Check
.................
......
6-9
Engine Oil Additives
.....................
........
5-18
Engine Oil Level Check
.....................................
6-9
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
.....................
6-5
Entertainment System
Cleaning the Video Screen
...........................
3-97
DVD Distortion
............................................
3-95
Entry Lighting
.................................................
3-16
Erasing HomeLink@ Buttons
.............................
2-43
Exit Lighting
...................................................
3-17
Express-Down Window
....................................
2-16
Extender, Safety Belt
.......................................
1-28
Exterior Lamps
...............................................
3-13
F
FabridCarpet ... ~
..........................................
5-75
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner
......................................
5-19
Finding a PTY Station
.....................
3-62, 3-68, 3-76
Finding a Station
............................
3-59, 3-66, 3-74
Finish Care .................................................... 5-79
Finish Damage
...............................................
5-80
Fixed Mast Antenna
........................................
3-97
Flash-to-Pass
...................................................
3-8
Flat Tire
........................................................
5-61
Flat Tire, Changing
.........................................
5-61
5
Fluid
Automatic Transmission
................................
5-21
Power Steering
...........................................
5-35
Windshield Washer
......................................
5-35
Fog Lamps
....................................................
3-15
Following Distance
..........................................
4-53
Footnotes
........................................................
6-5
Four-wheel Drive
....................................
2-25, 5-46
Front Axle
......................................................
5-46
Front Storage Area
.........................................
2-45
Fuel
...............................................................
5-5
Additives
......................................................
5-6
California Fuel ..............................................
5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
.....................
5-9
Filling Your Tank
...........................................
5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries
..............................
5-6
Gage
.........................................................
3-45
Gasoline Octane
...........................................
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
..................................
5-5
Low Warning Light
.......................................
3-45
System Inspection
.......................................
6-1 4
Fuel Information
..............................................
3-47
Fuses
FM
...............................................................
3-95
FUEL LEVEL LOW
.........................................
3-56
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
...........................
5-85
Windshield Wiper
.........................................
5-84
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light
..........................
3-44
Engine Coolant Temperature
.........................
3-38
Fuel
..........................................................
3-45
Oil Pressure
...........................................
3-41
Tachometer
.............................................
3-34
Voltmeter Gage
.......................................
3-36
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-40
Gasoline
Octane
........................................................
5-5
Gate Ajar Light ...............................................
3-44
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming
........
2-42
Glass Surfaces
...............................................
5-77
Glove Box
.....................................................
2-44
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities
....................................................
7-5
Speedometer
..........................................
3-34
Specifications ...............................................
5-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers
...................................
3-5
Head Restraints
...............................................
1-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
....................
3-8
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement
.....
......................
5-48
Electrical System
...
..............................
5-84
Headphones
...................................................
3-83
6
Heated Seats
...................................................
1-3
Highway Hypnosis
...........................................
4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads
..................................
4-33
Hitches
..........................................................
4-51
HomeLink@ Transmitter, Programming ............... 2-41
HomeLink@ Transmitter
...................................
2-40
Hood
Checking Things Under
................................
5-10
Release
.....................................................
5-1
0
Horn
...............................................................
3-6
How
to
Add Coolant
to
the Coolant
Recovery Tank
............................................
5-29
How to Add Coolant
to
the Radiator
..................
5-32
How to Add Fluid
............................................
5-22
How
to
Check
........................................
5-21,
5-54
How
to
Check Lubricant
...................................
5-45
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
..................
5-35
How
to
Use This Manual
......................................
ii
How
to
Wear Safety Belts Properly
...................
1-14
Hydroplaning
..................................................
4-29
ICE POSSIBLE
..............................................
3-56
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming From Your Engine
..........
5-27
If Steam
Is
Coming From Your Engine
...............
5-26
If the Light
Is
Flashing
.....................................
3-40
If the Light
Is
On Steady .............................. 3-40
If You Are Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow
.......
4-39
If
You
Do
Decide To Pull A Trailer
.....................
4-48
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
...........................
4-37
Ignition Positions
.............................................
2-19
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
......................
6-12
Infants and Young Children. Restraints
...............
1-31
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure
..................................
5-53
Inspection
Brake System
.............................................
6-14
Engine Cooling System
.............................
6-14
Exhaust System
............................
Fuel System
...........................................
6-14
Part C
-
Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-13
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal .................................. 6-13
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-wheel Drive)
...................................
6-14
Cluster
.......................................................
3-33
Overview
.....................................................
3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness
.............................
3-16
Interior Lamps
................................................
3-16
Interior Plastic Components
....................
.. 5-77
,
.. 6-14
Instrument Panel
Jump Starting
.....
J
........................................
5-40
7
Key Lock Cylinders Service
..............................
6-1
1
Keyless Entry System
.......................................
2-5
Keys
...............................................................
2-3
L
Lamps
Exterior
..................................................
3-1 3
Interior
.......................................................
3-1
6
Lamps On Reminder
....................................
3-1 4
Lap-Shoulder Belt .
.
..................
1-15,
1-23
LATCH System
Child Restraints
...........................................
1-40
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
..............................
1-42
Leather
.........................................................
5-77
Leaving Your Vehicle
.......................................
2-12
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running
......
2-29
Liftgate Release
..............................................
2-1
3
Liftgate/Liftglass
..............................................
2-1 3
LiftglasdLiftgate
..............................................
2-1 3
Light
Air Bag Readiness
.......................................
3-35
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
...................
3-38
Brake System Warning
.............................
3-37
Change Engine Oil
..................................
3-42
Charging System
.........................................
3-36
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
................................
3-57
Light (cont.)
Check Gages Warning
.................................
3-44
Cruise Control
.............................................
3-43
Gate Ajar
...................................................
3-44
Low Fuel Warning
.......................................
3-45
Malfunction Indicator
....................................
3-39
Reduced Engine Power
................................
3-43
Safety Belt Reminder
...................................
3-35
Security
.....................................................
3-42
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
...............................
2-16
Loading Your Vehicle
.......................................
4-45
Locking Rear Axle
............................................
4-9
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking
...........................................
2-9
Door
...........................................................
2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle
.....
.......................
2-12
Lockout Protection
.......................................
2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
.............
2-10
Rear Door Security Locks
.............................
2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light
...............................
3-45
Luggage Carrier ...........
........................
2-48
Lumbar
Manual Controls
........
.................
1-3
Power Controls
.........
.....................
1-3
Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light
.........
3-44
8
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts
............
5-98
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill
...........................................
6-9
At Least Once a Month
................................
6-10
At Least Once a Year
..................................
6-1 1
At Least Twice a Year
..................................
6-1
0
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-14
Engine Cooling System Inspection
.................
6-14
Exhaust System Inspection
...........................
6-1 4
Fuel System Inspection
................................
6-14
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction
..................................................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements
.............................
6-2
Part A
-
Scheduled Maintenance Services
.........
6-4
Part B
-
Owner Checks and Services
...............
6-9
Part C
-
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
......
6-13
Part D
-
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
....
6-15
Part
E
-
Maintenance Record
........................
6-17
Scheduled Maintenance
.................................
6-5
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot
and Seal Inspection
..........................
6-13
Transfer Case and Front Axle (Four-wheel
Drive) Inspection
......................................
6-1 4
Using Your
...................................................
6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment
...................
6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
.....................
4-56
Making Turns
.................................................
4-54
Malfunction Indicator Light
................................
3-39
Manual Lumbar Controls
....................................
1-3
Manual Seats
...................................................
1-2
Matching Transmitter(s)
to
Your Vehicle
...............
2-6
Memory Seat
..................................
.......
2-52
Message
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
IslandsKountries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands)
.................................
7-4
DIC Warnings and Messages
.........
.......
3-54
Mirror Operation
.............................................
2-34
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStarB
and Compass
..........................................
2-34
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist ............................................. 2-37
Outside Convex Mirror
.................................
2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors
................................
2-37
Outside Manual Mirrors
................................
2-35
Outside Power Mirrors
..................................
2-36
MyGMLink.com .............................................
7-3
New Vehicle Break-In
...........................
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... .... 2-19
....
5-98
9
0
P
Odometer
......................................................
3-34
Off-Road Recovery
..........................................
4-1
1
Oil
Change Engine
Oil
Light
...........................
3-42
Engine
.......................................................
5-1
5
Pressure Gage
............................................
3-41
Older Children, Restraints
................................
1-29
Online Owner Center
........................................
7-3
Onstar@ Personal Calling
................................
2-39
Onstar@ Services ........................................... 2-38
Onstar@ System
............................................
2-38
Paved Roads
..............................................
4-14
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
...............
3-55
Onstar@ Virtual Advisor
...................................
2-39
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Other Warning Devices
......................................
3-6
Outlet Adjustment
...................................
3-21, 3-26
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist
.........................................
2-37
Convex Mirror
.............................................
2-36
Heated Mirrors
............................................
2-37
Manual Mirrors
............................................
2-35
Power Mirrors
.............................................
2-36
Overhead Console
..........................................
2-44
Owners, Canadian
...............................................
ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-1
1
Park (P)
Parking
Shifting Out of
............................................
2-30
Brake
........................................................
2-28
Over Things That Burn
.................................
2-31
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
Parking on Hills
..............................................
4-55
Park( P)
Shifting Into
................................................
2-28
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services
............
6-4
Part B
-
Owner Checks and Services
..................
6-9
Part
C
-
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
..........
6-13
Part
D
-
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
....
6-15
Park (P) Mechanism Check
...........................
6-12
Part E
-
Maintenance Record
...........................
6-17
Passing
.................................................
4-12, 4-53
Passlock@ ..................................................... 2-18
Personalization
...............................................
3-48
Personalization, Climate Controls
......................
3-31
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape
..................................
3-70
Playing a Compact Disc
..................
3-63, 3-72, 3-79
Playing a Specific Loaded
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
..............................
3-56
Compact Disc
.............................................
3-79
Playing the Radio
...........................
3-59, 3-65, 3-74
10
Power
Accessory Outlets
....................................
3-1 8
Door Locks
..................................................
2-9
Electrical System
.........................................
5-84
Lumbar Controls
...........................................
1-3
Seat
............................................................
1-2
Steering Fluid
.............................................
5-35
Windows
....................................................
2-1 5
Power Steering
................................................
4-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
.................
2-1
0
Programmable Locking Feature ......................... 2-1
0
Programming the HomeLink@ Transmitter
...........
2-41
Reduced Engine Light
..................................
3-43
Programmable Unlocking Feature ...................... 2-1
1
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
.........
1-1 3
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-25
Radio Messages
.....................................
3.63. 3-70
Radios
..........................................................
3-58
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
................
3-96
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
..................
3-97
Care
of
Your CDs and DVDs
........................
3-97
Radio Personalization
...................................
3-94
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-65
Radios (cont.)
Radio with CD
............................................
3-59
Radio with Six-Disc CD
................................
3-74
Rear Seat Audio
..........................................
3-93
Setting the Time
..........................................
3-58
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-94
Understanding Reception
..............................
3-95
RainsenseTM Wipers .......................................... 3-9
RDS Messages
..............................
3-62, 3-69, 3-78
Reading Lamps
..........................................
3-17
REAR ACCESS OPEN
..........
...............
3-56
Rear Axle
................................
...........
5-45
Locking
........................................................
4-9
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-27
Rear Compartment Storage PanelKover
............
2-45
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Floor Storage Lid
....................................
2-49
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
....................................
3-93
Rear Seat Operation
.........................................
1-6
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
.........................
1-22
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts
..................
1-22
Rear Seats (TrailBlazer EXT)
.............................
1-7
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
..............................
5-91
Rear Window Defogger
............................
3-21, 3-25
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStarB and Compass
................................
2-34
Reclining Seatbacks
..........................................
1-4
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
......................
1-25
Rear Seat Entertainment System
.......................
3-83
Recreational Vehicle Towing
.............................
4-42
Reduced Engine Power Light
............................
3-43
Remote Control .............................................. 3-87
Remote Keyless Entry System
............................
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
.............................................
5-68
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
...................
5-62
Replacing Brake System Parts
..........................
5-39
Reporting Safety Defects
Replacement Bulbs
.........................................
5-49
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash
.....
1-60
Canadian Government
...................................
7-9
General Motors
...........................................
7-10
United States Government
..............................
7-9
Resetting Defaults
...........................................
2-43
Restraint System Check
...................................
6-10
Crash
.....................................................
1-60
Checking
................................................
1-59
Replacing Parts
...........................................
1-60
Restraints, Head
...............................................
1-5
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts
......
1-22
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@ Button
......
2-43
Checking Your Restraint Systems
...................
1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Restraint Systems
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
......................
2-20
RFA
#
BATTERY LOW
....................................
3-57
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
..............................
3-57
Roadside
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
...................
4-40
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
.......
2-32
Assistance Program
.......................................
7-5
S
Safety Belt
Safety Belts
Reminder Light
........................................
3-35
Care of
......................................................
5-78
Driver Position
............................................
1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
................
1-14
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
......................................
1-25
Rear Seat Passengers
.................................
1-22
Right Front Passenger Position
......................
1-22
Safety Belt Extender
....................................
1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
.................
1-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone
.........................
1-9
Safety Chains
.................................................
4-52
Safety Warnings and Symbols
..............................
III
Scheduled Maintenance
.....................................
6-5
Seats
Head Restraints
............................................
1-5
Heated Seats
...............................................
1-3
Manual
....................................................
1-2
...
12
Seats (cont.)
Manual Lumbar
...........................
...........
1-3
Memory
.....................................................
2-52
Power Lumbar
..............................................
1-3
Power Seats
.................................................
1-2
Rear Seat Operation
......................................
1-6
Reclining Seatbacks
......................................
1-4
Designed for the LATCH System
...................
1-42
Rear Outside Seat Position
...........................
1-43
Right Front Seat Position
..............................
1-46
Select
...........................................................
3-54
Service
...........................................................
5-3
of Your Vehicle
......................................
5-4
Securing a Child Restraint
Security Light
.................................................
3-42
Adding Equipment to the Outside
Doing Your Own Work
...................................
5-3
Engine Soon Light
.......................................
3-39
Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light
.....................
3-44
Publications Ordering Information
...................
7-1
0
SERVICE AIR BAG
.........................................
3-55
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
.............................
3-55
Service Bulletins
.............................................
7-1
1
Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
Service Manuals
.............................................
7-10
Setting Preset Stations
....................
3-60, 3-66, 3-75
Setting the Time
.............................................
3-58
Setting the Tone (BassTTreble)
..........
3-60, 3-67, 3-75
or Check Engine Light in Canada
..................
3-39
Setting Preset PTYs
........................................
3-77
Sheet Metal Damage
................................
5-80
Shift Lock Release
..........................................
2-24
Shifting Into Park (P)
..........
..........
2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P)
...................................
2-30
Skidding
........................................................
4-13
Snow Plow
....................................................
4-46
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
.......................
4-29
Spare Tire Check
............................................
6-10
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
.....................
5-76
Specifications, Capacities
.................................
5-96
Speedometer
..................................................
3-34
Starter Switch Check
.......................................
6-11
Starting Your Engine
.......................................
2-20
Steering
..........................................................
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
..................................
4-10
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
..............................
6-13
Steering Tips
..................................................
4-10
Steering Wheel Comfort Controls
......................
3-31
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio
.........................
3-95
Stereo RCA Jacks
..........................................
3-84
Storage Areas
Convenience Net
.........................................
2-49
Front Storage Area
......................................
2-45
Glove Box
..................................................
2-44
Luggage Carrier
..........................................
2-48
Overhead Console
.......................................
2-44
Rear Floor Storage Lid
.................................
2-49
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
..................
4-39
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
...............
5-72
13
Sun Visors
.....................................................
2-1 6 Top Strap
......................................................
1-38
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
.....................
2-44 Top Strap Anchor Location
...............................
1-40
Sunroof
.........................................................
2-51 Toraue Lock
...................................................
2-30
Table
.................................
Tachometer
.........................
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps
...........
Testing the Alarm
.................
Theft.Deterrent, Radio
..........
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
..................
4-51
Towing
Recreational Vehicle
.....................................
4-42
Towing a Trailer 4-47 Your Vehicle 4-42
..........................................
2-47
3-34
.......................... 5-48
..........................
2-18
.......................... 3-94
..........................
...............................................
..........................
Traction
Trailer Brakes
.................................................
4-52
Trailer Wiring Harness
.....................................
4-57
Assist System (TAS)
......................................
4-8
n
47
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE ............................. 3-56
Theft-Deterrent Systems
...................................
L-
I
I
Content Theft-Deterrent 2-1 7 Transfer Case 5-46
8
Transfer Case and Front Axle (Four-wheel
Passlock
..................................................
2-1
8
Tilt Wheel 3-6 Drive) Inspection 6-14
Tire Inflation Check 6-10 Transmission
Tires 5-53, 5-80 Fluid, Automatic 5-21
Buying New Tires 5-56 Transmission Operation, Automatic 2-22
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Chains
.......................................................
5-60
Changing a Flat Tire 5-61 Repair Manual 7-10
If
a Tire Goes Flat 5-61 Transportation Options 7-7
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure 5-53 Travel Note Recorder 2-44
Inspection and Rotation 5-54 Trip Information 3-46
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5-57 Trip Odometer 3-34
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
5-58
Turn and Lane Change Signals 3-7
Wheel Replacement 5-59
When It
Is
Time for New Tires
......................
5-56 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 3-7
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
....................
2-21 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
..................
4-54
................................................
................................
.........................................
........................................................
.........................................
...........................................
.....................................................
....................
........................................
............................................
....................................
......................................
.......................................
......................................
...............................
..............................................
................................
................................................
.........................
..........................
.................
.........................................
TURN SIGNAL ON 3-55
.....................................
...........................
Top of the Instrument Panel
.............................
5-77 Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
................................
4-43
14
Underbody Flushing Service
.............................
6-1 3
Understanding Radio Reception
........................
3-95
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
............................
5-57
United States
...................................................
7-4
Used
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Replacement Wheels
..............................
5-60
Cleaner on Fabric
..................................
5-76
HomeLink@
...........................................
2-43
Song List Mode
.....................................
3-81
the Recovery Hooks
...............................
4-40
RDS
....................................
3.61. 3.68. 3-76
Vehicle
Control
........................................................
4-5
Loading
......................................................
4-45
Symbols
.........................................................
iv
Number (VIN)
.............................................
5-83
Service Parts Identification Label
...................
5-83
Memory Seat
...........................................
2-52
Damage Warnings
...........................................
iv
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Storage
..........................................
5-39
Video Screen
.................................................
3-85
Vinyl
.............................................................
5-77
Visor Vanity Mirror
..........................................
2-16
Visors
...........................................................
2-16
Voltmeter Gage
..............................................
3-36
W
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators
................
3-32
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages
........................
3-54
Other Warning Devices
..................................
3-6
Vehicle Damage
..............................................
iv
Washing Your Vehicle
......................................
5-78
Weatherstrip Lubrication
...................................
6-11
Weight of the Trailer
........................................
4-49
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
.............................
4-50
What Kind
of
Engine Oil to Use
........................
5-16
What
to
Add
..................................................
5-37
What to Do with Used Oil
................................
5-19
What to Use
..................................
5-23, 5-35, 5-45
Hazard Warning Flashers
...............................
3-5
Safety and Symbols
III
...
.........................................
15
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance
..........................
5-58
When to Add Engine Oil
..................................
5-16
When to Change Engine
Oil
(GM Oil
Life System) ............................................... 5-18
When to Check
..............................................
5-54
When to Check and Change
............................
5-21
When to Check Lubricant
.................................
5-45
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
................
5-35
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
.........................................
4-56
Where to Put the Restraint
...............................
1-38
Why Safety Belts Work
....................................
1-1
0
Window Lockout
.............................................
2-16
Windows
...................................................
2-1 4
Replacement
...............................................
5-59
Windows (cont.)
Power
........................................................
2-15
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades
...........
5-79
Windshield Washer
...........................................
3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................
6-10
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
......................................
5-50
Fuses
........................................................
5-84
Windshield Wipers
............................................
3-8
Winter Driving
................................................
4-35
Wiper Blade Check
.........................................
6-10
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....
....
6-2
16
h
NOTES

Navigation menu